fashion institute of technology · 2019-08-13 · fashion institute of technology mfa fashion...

450
INVITATION TO BID Project C1371 Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor 340 Eighth Avenue, New York, NY 10001 April 7, 2017

Upload: others

Post on 03-Jul-2020

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

INVITATION TO BID

Project C1371

Fashion Institute of Technology

MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor 340 Eighth Avenue, New York, NY 10001

April 7, 2017

Page 2: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017
Page 3: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 01 10 - Table of Contents Page 1 of 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 00 - Project Manual Cover 00 01 10 - Table of Contents 00 01 15 - List of Drawing Sheets BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Advertisement for Bids Attachment A - Bid Checklist Attachment B - Contractor Reference Sheet Instructions to Bidders:

I. Introduction II. Scope of Work III. Bidder Requirements IV. Approval of Subcontractors V. Bid Security VI. Bid Designation VII. Pre-Bid Site Inspection and Questions VIII. Preparation of the Bids IX. Award of Contract X. Damages for Failure to Enter Into Contract XI. Prevailing Wage

General Requirements: I. General Requirements II. General Notes III. Demolition Notes IV. Additional Contractor’s Responsibilities

IFB # C1371 – Bid Analysis Form GENERAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 – SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 - Summary 01 26 16 - Contractor’s Requests for Information 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 01 33 01 - Submittal Review Stamp 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching

Page 4: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 01 10 - Table of Contents Page 2 of 4

01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 36 00 - Concrete Floor Finish System DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 22 10 - Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 17 00 - Support System for Suspended Ceilings 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing 07 84 13 - Penetration Firestopping 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 08 88 13 - Fire-Resistant Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board 09 51 23 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings

Page 5: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 01 10 - Table of Contents Page 3 of 4

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces 10 14 00 - Signage 10 51 13 - Metal Lockers DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 - Roller Window Shades DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 05 12 - General Provisions for HVAC Work 23 05 67 - Duct Cleaning 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing 23 07 00 - Insulation for HVAC Work 23 31 13 - Sheet Metal Ductwork DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 26 24 16 – Panelboards 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices and Installation Components 26 28 13 – 600 Volt Fuses 26 28 16 – Safety and Disconnect Switches 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cable for Electronic Safety and Security 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 6: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 01 10 - Table of Contents Page 4 of 4

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 7: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 00 01 15 - List of Drawing Sheets

Page 1 of 2

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS SECTION 00 01 15

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings, dated April 7, 2017, and other drawings of type indicated:

GENERAL

DWG. NO. TITLE

T-001.00 COVER G-001.00 GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS, AND

DRAWING LIST ARCHITECTURAL

DWG. NO. TITLE

A-101.00 6TH FLOOR REMOVAL PLAN, NEW CONSTRUCTION & REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A-401.00 PARTITIONS, DOOR, SCHEDULE, TYPES, & DETAILS A-801.00 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-811.00 CEILING DETAILS A-901.00 6TH FLOOR FURNITURE AND FINISH PART PLANS &

SCHEDULES MECHANICAL

DWG. NO. TITLE

M-011.00 SIXTH FLOOR REMOVALS, CONSTRUCTION, & REFLECTED CEILING PART PLAN

M-100.00 SIXTH FLOOR NEW PLAN ELECTRICAL

DWG. NO. TITLE

E-001.00 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIST, NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS E-011.00 SIXTH FLOOR POWER AND LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLANS E-101.00 SIXTH FLOOR POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E-301.00 DETAILS E-302.00 PART PLAN AND SCHEDULES

Page 8: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 00 01 15 - List of Drawing Sheets

Page 2 of 2

FIRE ALARM

DWG. NO. TITLE FA-101.00 SIXTH FLOOR FIRE ALARM PLAN

END OF DOCUMENT

Page 9: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 1 of 10

SUMMARY SECTION 01 10 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work covered by Contract Documents.

B. Physical Completion Date.

C. Work by Owner & Work under separate contracts.

D. Owner-furnished products.

E. Examination of premises.

F. Connection to electrical equipment or systems

G. Contractor use of premises

H. Coordination with occupants.

I. Work restrictions.

J. Specification and drawing conventions.

K. Laying out

L. Cleaning up

M. Sustainability requirements.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01311 - Project Analysis

B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls

Page 10: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 2 of 10

C. Section 01 73 29 - Removals, Cutting and Patching.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Project Scope: 1. Asbestos contaminated material will be removed by a certified asbestos

remover prior to the work of this contract.

2. Work on the 5th and 7th floors can only be performed between 10 PM and

6AM.

3. General Contractor is responsible to coordinate with Mechanical, Fire Alarm, and Electrical Contractors and provide coordination drawings for review by the Architect for locations of all openings and penetrations in

walls, floors, and ceilings, including but not limited to: outlets, switches, floor boxes, exposed conduit runs, diffusers, etc.

Demolition: General Construction 1. See Demolition / Removal Drawings for extent of removals.

2. All additional work required for the project. Demolition – Mechanical/Electrical/Fire Protection

1. See Demolition / Removal Drawings for the extent of removals New General Construction:

1. Patch all damaged walls, concrete ceilings and beams, CMU where miss-

ing. Re-plaster walls where existing ceilings have been removed to un-

derside of the ceiling slab or beam and where demolished at chases for

access to plumbing lines.

2. Furnish and install new GWB with metal studs for rated, non rated and

sound rated partitions. Furnish and install GWB ceilings with NYC ap-

proved hanger support system.

3. Furnish and install new acoustic tile ceilings with NYC approved hanger

support system.

4. Furnish and install supplemental steel framing for walls, countertops and

wall hung cabinets and equipment.

5. Furnish and install rated hollow metal frames and doors with all associat-

ed hardware and glazing.

6. Furnish and install new manually controlled dual roll shades at windows at

exterior walls. Furnish and install new manually controlled single roll

shades at corridor door glazing.

7. Furnish and install sound seals and acoustic insulation at all new parti-

Page 11: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 3 of 10

tions and ceilings.

8. Furnish and install fire stopping material at all penetrations through rated

partitions, ceilings and floors. Coordinate with all other trades

9. Furnish and install vinyl floor tile, bases, and reducer strips.

10. Furnish and install access panels.

11. Furnish and install glass marker boards and tack boards.

12. Patch prime and paint all exposed surfaces including GWB, plaster, con-

crete, hollow metal doors and frames, exposed metal surfaces.

13. Repair and finish surfaces where existing materials are removed.

14. All other work shown and required.

New Mechanical Work

1. Furnish and install new ductwork with all associated fittings

2. Furnish and install, diffusers, registers as detailed and specified.

3. Provide connections to existing ductwork as detailed.

4. Furnish and install heating and cooling controls.

5. Test, adjust and balance new and existing systems as required.

6. Coordinate electrical work for all mechanical equipment.

7. All other Mechanical Work as detailed and required.

8. Furnish and install fire stopping material at all rated partitions, ceilings

and floors. New Electrical Work

1. Furnish and install lighting fixtures and control systems.

2. Furnish and install receptacles throughout renovated spaces along with

boxes and conduit to support telephone/data, audio/video, and security

systems.

3. Furnish and install floor boxes and conduit via 5th floor ceiling.

4. Furnish and install new electrical panels and wiring.

5. Provide electrical support for mechanical equipment.

6. Furnish and install fire stopping material at all rated partitions, ceilings

and floors. New Fire Alarm Work

1. Provide fire alarm components tied into the existing building fire alarm system, including but not limited to strobes, detectors, sensors, horns, bells.

2. Furnish and install fire stopping material at all rated partitions, ceilings and floors.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

Page 12: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 4 of 10

1.5 PHYSICAL COMPLETION DATE

A. Physically complete the Work within FIT's established calendar after the Agreement is approved by the College. 1. Substantial Completion Date will be on or before August 11, 2017.

a. Prior to the Substantial Completion date, all testing, balancing, inspections and special inspections will be complete and at least their initial finding reports for each system or test will be issued to FIT and the Architect.

b. All labor costs encountered to meet this deadline are the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the Bid Price. FIT reserves the right, at no financial liability associated with the same, to put the Project work on hold on as many as three (3) separate occasions during the course of the Project. Absent circumstances that require extended delay, each such hold shall not exceed twenty-four (24) hours in length.

1.6 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner, owner’s agents, or separate contractors so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner and work performed under separate contracts.

B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1. Asbestos contaminated material will be removed by a certified asbestos

remover prior to the work of this contract.

C. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform construction operations at project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

D. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. Low voltage, security, and data wiring.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

Page 13: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 5 of 10

B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Furniture systems and equipment.

1.8 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES

A. Verification of Existing Conditions after Award 1. Various existing conditions at locations of the Work which cannot be de-

termined until removals are under way cannot be indicated on the Draw-ings or described in the Specifications.

2. Perform all such removals as required to verify all existing conditions be-fore fabricating the work.

3. Where applicable, before disturbing any structural work, make all pos-sible preliminary investigations to verify the existing conditions threat. Notify Architect of any existing conditions not previously documented prior to proceeding with work.

4. Where removals or preliminary investigations reveal existing conditions that differ materially from what is indicated or specified, or that may re-quire changes, immediately notify the Architect in writing and await in-structions before proceeding further with that part of the work.

B. Discrepancies in Existing Conditions:

1. During the process of the Work, should conditions be encountered that ma-terially differ from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifi-cations, or conditions which could not reasonably have been anticipated, which conditions will materially affect the cost of the Work, such conditions shall immediately be called to the attention of the Architect, before they are further disturbed. The Architect will promptly investigate the conditions and if it is found that they do so materially differ, shall issue a clarification.

1.9 CONNECTION TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS

A. Contractor will not be allowed to tie into electrical equipment or systems until the FIT Facilities Management Department has reviewed and approved the connection. 1. Submit written procedures to the FIT Facilities Management Depart-

ment, detailing how the connection Work is proposed to be performed. 2. After procedures have been approved, notify the FIT Representative at

least 3 working days prior to the connection Work so that arrangements can be made to have a FIT Facilities Management Department Repre-sentative witness the Work.

1.10 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

Page 14: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 6 of 10

A. Comply with the Facility’s Visitor Identification Policy. A copy of the current policy will be distributed at the initial job meeting.

B. Work hours shall be as established by the Facilities authorities.

C. Check in with the Facility Representative, as directed, at the beginning of each work day. Furnish information regarding where employees will be working during the day.

D. Comply with applicable Federal and State of New York Right-to-Know

Law provisions and supply copies of the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the FIT Facility’s Right-to-Know Information Officer.

E. Do not diminish the level of life safety during performance of the

Work. F. Contractor responsible to coordinate with Owner and make all neces-

sary provisions to receive materials and remove debris.

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) on its campus during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent

occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction on the 6th floor. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent

occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

Page 15: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 7 of 10

C. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each

specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.12 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements

of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. All Work must be performed according to a Work schedule outlined by FIT

Facilities Unit and will not disrupt school activities. Any Work that is disruptive to school activities shall be performed as Work After School Hours.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Regular work hours in the building are from 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., Monday through Friday, legal and union holidays excluded, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., Saturday and Sunday. 2. After School Hours: 10 p.m. to 6 a.m., Monday through Sunday. 3. School Break & Holiday Hours: same as Weekend and After School Hours. 4. Hours for Service Shutdowns and new Electrical Panel Connections:

Weekend or School Break Hours. 5. Hours for Core Drilling, demolition, or other noisy or dusty activity: After

School Hours 6. Contractor shall comply with FIT’s additional work rules related to such

extended access 7. Contractor will have access to the site in order to complete the work in the

given time frame. All labor costs required to meet the deadline are the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the contract.

C. Existing Service Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

Page 16: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 8 of 10

1. Notify Owner or owner’s representative not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner or owner’s representative not less than three (3) days in

advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive

operations.

1.13 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all sections in the specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the specifications. One (1) or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic

terms used in the individual specifications sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations

published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing specification section numbers found in this Project Manual.

1.14 LAYING OUT

A. Examine the Contract Documents thoroughly and promptly report any errors or discrepancies to the Architect before commencing the Work.

B. Lay out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Page 17: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 9 of 10

1.15 CLEANING UP

A. Clean up and containerize rubbish (refuse, debris, waste materials, and removed materials and equipment) resulting from the Work at the end of each work day. Leave work areas broom clean. Locate containerized rubbish as directed.

B. Remove piled rubbish from property at least once a week or more often if the rubbish presents a hazard. Properly dispose of rubbish. Burning of rubbish will not be permitted.

1.16 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall meet sustainability performance and documentation requirements to comply with NYC Local Law 86 of 2005, and to achieve the following objectives: sustainable site use, water use reduction, conservation of energy and resources, and improvement of indoor environmental quality.

B. Sustainability performance requirements include, but are not limited to: water use reduction, energy conservation, construction waste management, and indoor air quality controls during construction and prior to occupancy.

C. Sustainability documentation requirements include, but are not limited to, Contractor’s Certification Form, cost information, documentation on VOC content, urea-formaldehyde content and recycled and regional content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

Page 18: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 10 00 – Summary

Page 10 of 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 19: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 26 16 - Contractor's Requests For Information

Page 1 of 4

CONTRACTOR'S REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION SECTION 01 26 16

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Administrative requirements for requests for information.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Request For Information (RFI): A document submitted by a Contractor requesting information clarifying a portion of the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as an RFI, which is required to properly perform the Work.

B. Improper RFl: An RFI that is not properly prepared or that requests information that, in the opinion of the Architect, is discernable from the Contract Documents, that has previously been addressed and documented in job meeting minutes or where time permits it to be addressed at a subsequent job meeting. 1. Costs incurred by the Architect to process an Improper RFI will be

backcharged to the Contractor in accordance with procedures set forth elsewhere in this Section.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION FORM

A. RFI's shall be submitted on a form prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Architect, which shall include the following items: 1. Date of RFI 2. RFI Number 3. To (Including Name, Address, Phone and Fax Numbers of Recipient) 4. From (Including Name, Address, Phone and Fax Numbers of Sender) 5. Project Name 6. Architect’s Project Number 7. Latest date response is required by Sender 8. Clearly stated description of information required.

Page 20: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 26 16 - Contractor's Requests For Information

Page 2 of 4

9. A space for the Recipient to indicate if a Potential Cost / Time Change is anticipated.

10. Contractor's proposed solution or recommendation. 11. A space for the Recipient to record the Response Date. 12. A space for the Recipient to record the Respondent’s name. 13. A space for the Recipient to record the response.

1.5 SUBMITTAL OF RFI'S BY CONTRACTOR

A. A properly prepared request for information shall include a detailed written statement that indicates the specific Drawings or Specification in need of clarification and the nature of the clarification requested. 1. Forms shall be completely filled in, and if prepared by hand, shall be fully

legible after photocopying or transmission by facsimile (fax). a. Drawings shall be referenced by number and location on the drawing

sheet. b. Specifications shall be referenced by Section number, page and

paragraph. 2. RFl's shall be submitted in numerical order with no breaks in the

consecutive numbering. 3. Each page of attachments to RFI's shall bear the RFI number in upper right

hand corner and shall be consecutively numbered in chronological order. 4. RFI's may be submitted by E-Mail, facsimile or regular mail; E-mail

addresses will be distributed at the Pre-Construction Conference. Contractor shall use only one (1) transmission method, e-mail, facsimile or regular mail for each RFI; follow-ups in another form shall not be sent.

B. When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents, the material, process or system to be installed, the Architect shall be requested to make a clarification of the indeterminate item. 1. When possible, such clarification shall be requested at the next appropriate

project meeting, with the response entered into the meeting minutes. When clarification at the meeting is not possible, either because of the urgency of the need, or the complexity of the item, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI to the Architect.

C. RFI's from subcontractors, vendors or material suppliers must be submitted through, reviewed by, and signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect’s designated representative.

D. Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the RFI is not an "Improper RFI."

E. RFI's shall not be used for the following purposes: 1. To request approval of submittals. 2. To request approval of substitutions.

Page 21: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 26 16 - Contractor's Requests For Information

Page 3 of 4

3. To request changes which are known to entail additional cost or credit. Use a Change Order Request form instead.

4. To request different methods of performing work other than those drawn and / or specified.

F. In the event the Contractor believes that a clarification by the Architect will result in additional cost or time, Contractor shall not proceed with the work indicated by the RFI until a Change Order (or Construction Change Directive, if applicable to project) is prepared and approved.

G. Contractor shall prepare and maintain a log of RFI's, and at any time requested by the Architect, Contractor shall furnish copies of the log showing outstanding RFI's. Contractor shall note unanswered RFI's in the log.

1.6 ARCHITECT'S PROCESSING OF RFI'S

A. The Architect will require a minimum of five (5) working days from Architect's receipt to respond to the RFI.

B. Answered RFI's shall not be construed as approval to perform extra work.

C. Architect will respond to RFl's on one of the following forms: 1. Properly Prepared RFI's:

a. Response directly upon Request for Information form or attached thereto.

2. Improper RFI's That Are Not Properly Prepared: a. Returned noted "IMPROPER - INCOMPLETE."

3. Improper RFI's That Have Been Previously Addressed or Addressed in Meeting Minutes: a. Returned noted "IMPROPER – PREVIOUSLY ADDRESSED."

4. Improper RFI's That Are Adequately Addressed on Contract Documents: a. Returned noted "IMPROPER – SEE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS."

1.7 PROCEDURES FOR ARCHITECT'S PROCESSING OF RFI’S

A. Process for Backcharging: 1. Improper RFI's will be processed by the Architect at the Architect's standard

hourly billing rates. 2. Architect will charge the Owner and the Owner will deduct such costs from

monies still due the Contractor.

Page 22: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 26 16 - Contractor's Requests For Information

Page 4 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

Page 23: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page i of 23

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 01 31 46

TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE № PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................. 1 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 2 1.04 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 2 1.05 DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................. 3 1.06 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 3 1.07 VISITING THE SITE .................................................................................................... 4 1.08 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .................................................................................. 4 1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................... 6 1.10 LAWS, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES ............................................................. 8 1.11 INDEMNIFICATION ..................................................................................................... 8 1.12 ORGANIZATION OF WORK ........................................................................................ 9 1.13 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ..............................................................10 1.14 SHUTDOWNS ............................................................................................................10 1.15 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION ....................................................10 1.16 SLEEVES, PIPE AND CONDUIT INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS ..........................11 1.17 ESCUTCHEONS ........................................................................................................13 1.18 MANUFACTURERS' IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................13 1.19 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES ......................................................................................13 1.20 TAGS AND CHARTS ..................................................................................................13 1.21 IDENTIFICATION .......................................................................................................14 1.22 QUIET OPERATION ...................................................................................................15 1.23 RUBBISH REMOVAL .................................................................................................15 1.24 CLEANING, PIPING, DUCTS AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................16 1.25 DELIVERY OF MATERIAL .........................................................................................16 1.26 CUTTING AND PATCHING (IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION) ..................................16 1.27 ALTERATIONS ...........................................................................................................17 1.28 PAINTING ...................................................................................................................17 1.29 TESTS ........................................................................................................................20 1.30 GUARANTEE .............................................................................................................20 1.31 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION ....................................................................21 1.32 SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION ....................................21

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) ......................................................................................22 PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................22

3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT ..............................................................................22 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 24: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 1 of 23

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Where items of the General Conditions are repeated in this Section of the Specifications, it is intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them; it is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated herein.

C. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors and Subcontractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Sprinkler and Electrical Sections of the Specifications.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. "The Contractor" or "Each Contractor" means specifically, the Contractor or Subcontractor working under his respective Section (Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Sprinkler or Electrical) of this Specification.

B. "Provide" means to supply, erect, install, and connect up in complete readiness for regular operation, the particular work referred to.

C. "Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the job.

D. "Piping" includes, in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories related to such piping.

E. "Concealed" means hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, or embedded in construction.

F. "Exposed" means "not concealed" as defined above. Work in trenches, crawl spaces, and tunnels shall be considered "exposed" unless otherwise specifically noted. Work located in mechanical rooms, accessible attics, open storage rooms, janitor’s closets, on the roof or anywhere outdoors shall be considered “exposed”.

G. "Approved equal" means any equipment or material which, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, design, performance, physical dimensions, and arrangement to the equipment or material specified, and will function adequately in accordance with the general design.

H. "Governmental" means all municipal, state and federal governmental agencies.

Page 25: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 2 of 23

I. Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number (such as "the pump"), such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the Drawings.

J. "HVAC" means Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. NY City Building Code, Mechanical Code

B. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

C. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

D. ANSI American National Standards Institute

E. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

F. AWWA American Water Works Association

G. IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers

H. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

I. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

J. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

K. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

L. UL Underwriters' Laboratories

M. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

N. ADC Air Diffusion Council

O. AABC Associated Air Balance Council

P. 1980 National Standard Plumbing Code with all New Jersey State Amendments.

Q. Local Water Company Rules and Regulations

R. NFPA-90A Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems

1.04 INTENT

A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. All materials, equipment, and apparatus shall be new and of first-class quality.

Page 26: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 3 of 23

B. Any apparatus, appliance, material, or work not shown on Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories, or minor details not shown but necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided without additional expense to the Owner.

1.05 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment; ducts, conduits, piping, and fixtures.

B. The locations of all items shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Architect before being installed. Do not scale Drawings.

C. Follow Drawings in laying out work and check Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where headroom and space conditions appear inadequate, Architect shall be notified before proceeding with installation.

D. If directed by the Architect, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.

E. Piping or ductwork connected to equipment may require different size connection than indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide transition pieces as required at the equipment.

1.06 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Any questions or disagreements arising as to the true intent of this Specification or the Drawings or the kind and quality of work required thereby shall be decided by the Architect, whose interpretations thereof shall be final, conclusive, and binding on all parties.

B. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, the better quality, greater quantity or more costly work shall be included in the Bid Price and the matter referred to the Architect's attention for decision and/or adjustment prior to the Contractor’s submission of their Bid. If such ambiguity is identified by the Contractor during construction (after bid period), then the Architect shall be consulted merely to decide on the proper technical approach; the more costly work’s value shall be included.

C. Maintain an awareness to avoid space conflict with other trades.

Page 27: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 4 of 23

D. Purchase the equipment and material required in accordance with field measurements taken at the proper time during the construction progress.

1.07 VISITING THE SITE

A. Before submitting the final proposal, examine the site of the proposed work to determine the existing conditions that may affect the work, as this Section will be held responsible for any assumptions in regard.

1.08 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. The proposal and bid must cover all items on the Drawings and in the Specifications exactly as drawn and specified.

B. All proposed substitutions of equipment of other manufacturers than those specified shall be attached to the base bid in an itemized list. Directly opposite each item indicate the amount to be added to or deducted from the base bid if the proposal is accepted. Failure to furnish such an itemized list will be interpreted to mean that it is agreed to provide all items exactly as drawn and specified. The information given in the above itemized list will in no way affect the determination of low bidder.

C. Substitutions of material and equipment of makes other than specifically named on the Drawings and in the Specifications and as provided for in the above paragraph will be approved for the following reasons only:

D. The material or equipment proposed for substitution is equal to or superior to that specified; and that the material or equipment called for on the Drawings or in the Specifications cannot be delivered to the job in time to complete the work in proper sequence to the work of other trades, due to conditions beyond control.

E. To receive consideration, requests for substitutions must be accompanied by documentary proof of equality and difference in price and delivery, if any, in the form of certified quotations from suppliers of both specified and proposed equipment. In case of a difference in price, the Owner shall receive a credit and all benefits of the difference in cost involved in any substitutions.

F. The words "or approved equal" shall be understood to apply only to those items of equipment and material listed under the paragraph "List of Approved Manufacturers" or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

G. Within twenty (20) working days after the acceptance of the proposal, and prior to the submission of any shop drawings for review, a complete list of manufacturers shall be submitted to the Architect of all equipment and materials proposed for the work. No reviews will be rendered on shop drawings submitted before the complete list of manufacturers is reviewed.

H. If material or equipment is installed before the Contractor obtained "No Objections" comment from Architect, and/or in the opinion of the Architect the material or

Page 28: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 5 of 23

equipment does not meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, the removal and replacement shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner.

I. The materials, workmanship, design, and arrangement of all work installed under the Contract shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

J. If material or equipment is installed before the Contractor obtained "No Objections" comment from the Architect, trade installing same shall be liable for the removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Architect, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

K. The words "or approved equal" are understood to follow: 1. The name of any manufacturer, vendor, equipment or materials; 2. Any trade name, plate number, or catalog number; 3. Any detailed description used to define equipment or material; except where

otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. 4. It is the intent of these Specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product

is specified, and the terms "other approved" or "or approved equal" are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the specified item. Consideration will not be given to claim that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction (such as lesser heat exchange surface, etc.) Performance as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

L. All equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be new and without blemish or defect. All electrical equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters' Laboratories approval. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of the material or equipment is indicated, a first class standard article shall be furnished.

M. Where it is proposed to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or of any other part of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore shall, with the review of the Architect and subsequent comments by the Architect "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" on the shop drawings, be prepared at no additional cost to the Owner.

N. Where such deviation from contract documents requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring, and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.

O. Note that the comments "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" marked on the shop drawings or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified does not assure that the Engineer, Architect, or any other Owner's representative attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the

Page 29: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 6 of 23

material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of equipment. Comments on the shop drawings does not invalidate the Plans and Specifications if the shop drawings are in conflict with the Plans and Specifications.

1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prior to delivery to job site, but sufficiently in advance of requirements necessary to allow Architect ample time for review, submit copies (as stated in "General Conditions") of shop drawings of all equipment, materials, piping, sleeves, conduit, ductwork, and wiring diagrams, and further obtain written comments "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" for same from the Architect, before installing any of these items.

B. All shop drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD. Manually drafted shop drawings are prohibited. If a Contractor is incapable of developing CAD drawings in-house, then they shall engage the services of an external drafting service in order to do so. The cost for such service shall be borne by the Contractor and included as part of their bid. Shop drawing submittals shall be on paper as described herein. While shop drawings are being developed and revised throughout the construction process, the Contractor shall continually update the CAD files. As construction approaches completion, these shop drawing CAD files will develop into “As-Built” drawings. As part of standard project close-out documents, in addition to providing conventional paper copies of As-Built Shop Drawings, the Contractor must also provide CD’s containing electronic AutoCAD versions of same.

C. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's certified scale drawings, cuts, or catalogs, including descriptive literature and complete certified characteristics of equipment, showing dimensions, capacity, code requirements, motor and drive testing, as indicated on the Drawings or Specifications.

D. Certified performance curves for all pumping and fan equipment shall be submitted for review.

E. Shop drawings submitted with insufficient information shall be rejected without review.

F. All shop drawings and submittals shall be sent via email in PDF format. Other electronic file formats will be rejected without review. Additionally, large format prints (larger than 18” x 24”) shall also be sent in paper (hard copy) form, either mailed or hand delivered. If and where such hard copies are sent, the Contractor shall send a sufficient quantity of prints of each, knowing that one (1) copy will each be required for the Engineer’s record, the Architect, the Owner and various subcontractors.

G. Samples of materials or equipment, when requested by the Architect, shall be submitted for review.

H. Provide a detailed Transmittal with all shop drawings, via email. Any Transmittal, Shop drawing, sample, specification, etc. which is not labeled with all of the following information shall be rejected without review: 1. Project name 2. Project location

Page 30: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 7 of 23

3. Contractor's name and address, Subcontractor's name and address 4. Applicable section and article number of specifications 5. Contractor's approval stamp and signature 6. Submission number 7. Specific service for which material is to be used.

I. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which review is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.

J. Shop drawings indicating an unsuitable manufacturer shall be rejected without review.

K. The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare ductwork shop drawings at ⅜"=1'-0" scale and submit to the Architect for their approval to prepare the coordination drawings as called for in paragraph 1.14. Ductwork shop drawings shall be drawn with double line ductwork and shall indicate the elevation above finished floor of all ducts, location and height of building structure (beams, etc.), lengths of fabrication pieces and fittings. Show new and existing work. Shop drawings submitted shall be ready for sheet metal fabrication.

L. The comments "No Exception" or "Exceptions as Noted" rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, said review does not in any way relieve responsibility, or necessity, of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

M. "EXCEPTIONS, AS NOTED" means, unless otherwise noted on the drawings to approved for construction, fabrication and/or manufacture subject the provision that the work shall be carried out in compliance with all annotations and/or corrections indicated on the shop drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If also marked "RESUBMIT", "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" is invalid and a corrected submittal of the drawing is required.

N. If a shop drawing is resubmitted and does not comply with all of the comments indicated on the previous submission(s), and does not reflect specific reasons for such non-compliance, it shall be rejected without review.

O. Label resubmitted shop drawings with a stamp indicating the submittal number, for example: SECOND SUBMISSION; THIRD SUBMISSION, etc. and send separate transmittals for each item being submitted so that one transmittal does not cover more than one specific item or group of items from one manufacturer.

P. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle an extension of Contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

Q. Prior to submission of shop drawings, thoroughly check each shop drawing, reject those not conforming to the Specifications, and indicate (by signature) that the shop drawings submitted meet Contract requirements. Deviations and/or exceptions to the contract documents should be clearly noted as being deviations and/or exceptions.

Page 31: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 8 of 23

The Contractor will later be required to correct such deviation and/or exceptions at his own expense, if they have not been noted and approved on the shop drawing.

R. All shop drawings showing routing of ductwork, piping and conduit, shall be not less than ⅜" = 1'-0" scale.

S. Incorporate a numbering system to help keep track of shop drawing submittals as follows: 1. H ....................................................................................... HVAC shop drawings 2. P .................................................................................. Plumbing shop drawings 3. SP ................................................................................. Sprinkler shop drawings 4. E ................................................................................... Electrical shop drawings

T. Concurrent numbers shall follow the prefix letter. Example: H-1, H-2, etc. In addition, shop drawings requiring resubmission should bear the number of the original submission and bear a suffix as follows: H-1A (second submission), H-1B (third submission), etc.

U. Before request for acceptance and final payment for the work, write a letter to the Architect stating that all shop drawings are brought to a condition "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted". Any outstanding shop drawings must be cleared with the Engineer.

1.10 LAWS, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all governmental taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with the work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents, and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required Certificates of Inspection for the work and deliver to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. File for and obtain all required equipment use permits, controlled inspections, submission of fire alarm as-built drawings, backflow prevention device (BFP) sign-offs, boiler and domestic hot water heater filings with DEP and all other required filings.

B. Include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, (in addition to Contract Drawings and Documents) in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

C. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association, with all requirements of local utility companies, with the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction, and with the requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction.

1.11 INDEMNIFICATION

A. Pay all royalties and defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof.

Page 32: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 9 of 23

B. If process or article specified is an infringement of a patent, promptly notify the Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work specified knowing it to be an infringement of patent, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.

C. Take out all necessary insurance, free of extra charge, and agree to indemnify and save harmless the party contracting for services against loss or expense, by reason of the liability imposed by law upon such party for damages because of bodily injuries, including death at any time resulting therefrom, accidentally sustained by any person or persons or on account of damage to property arising out of or in consequence of the performance of this Contract, whether such injuries to persons or damage to property are due or claimed to be due to any negligence in the performance of the Contract, the party contracting for services, employees or agents, or any other person.

1.12 ORGANIZATION OF WORK

A. The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Engineers, Owners and Architects, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the Drawings and Specifications, and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith.

B. The work called for under this Contract shall be carried on simultaneously with the work of other trades in a manner such as not to delay the overall progress of the work. Furnish promptly to other trades involved at the project, all information and measurements relating to the work which they may require. Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony necessary in the interest of the project as a whole.

C. Furnish and install all work as fast as possible to meet all construction schedules.

D. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Such superintendent shall be replaced if unsatisfactory to the Owner.

E. Upon award of contract, consult with the Architect and negotiate with subcontractors and manufacturers, and within thirty (30) days submit five (5) copies of a preliminary list of major equipment, for approval, complete with name of manufacturer, dates of purchase orders, and delivery dates to the site. Also submit within thirty (30) days, five (5) copies of a preliminary schedule of installation of the various systems. This list shall be revised monthly and five (5) copies shall be submitted. The second submittal shall contain the names of manufacturers of scheduled equipment (with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local representatives).

F. Maintain a complete file of shop drawings at all times available to the Owner's representative.

G. Every facility shall be provided to permit inspection of the work by the Owner's representative during the course of construction.

Page 33: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 10 of 23

H. Where items of equipment and/or materials are indicated in the Specifications as being furnished by other trades for installation, assume responsibility for the unloading of such equipment and/or materials from the delivery trucks, and for providing safe storage for same as required pending installation.

I. Where the work is to be installed in close proximity to work of other trades, or where there is evidence that the work is to interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.

1.13 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. Maintain and protect all equipment, materials and tools from loss or damage from all causes until final acceptance by the Owner.

B. Assume responsibility for the protection of any finished work or other trades from damage or defacement by the operations and remedy any such injury or damages.

1.14 SHUTDOWNS

A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such regular time or at overtime when designated by the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Owner shall be notified of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed.

C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance, including overtime, when approved by the Owner, if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections.

1.15 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION

A. Install all work so that all parts required are readily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of magnitude shall not be made without prior written review from the Architect.

B. Wherever mechanisms requiring access for maintenance, reading of instruments, or for operation are concealed in the structure and wherever else indicated on the Drawings, supply access doors of sizes necessary to provide ready access to the concealed items. Group together valves, controls, dampers, traps, expansion joints, cleanouts, gauges, switches, and other equipment requiring access in walls and furred spaces to reduce the number of access doors.

C. Access doors shall be Milcor Style A, B or K, L or M, as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co. or approved equal. Minimum access door shall be 12" x 12". For installation in plastered wall or ceiling, provide Style "K" or "L" as required. For installation in masonry walls, provide Style "M". For installation in acoustical tile surfaces, provide Style "AT". For installation in acoustical plaster surfaces provide

Page 34: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 11 of 23

Style "AP". Fire resistive access doors for suspended dry wall ceiling shall be Style ATC's. Provide fire rated access doors at fire rated shafts, stairwells, corridors and at all other walls with Fire Rating.

D. Provide 24" x 24" access door for each duct or pipe shaft. Provide at least one (1) per floor, or as indicated on the drawings. Provide 18” x 24” access door in each outside air and exhaust air plenum.

E. Access doors shall be installed in building structure under a separate Section.

F. All plumbing, electric and heating and ventilating access doors etc., shall be provided with Corbin #2722-1/2 master keyed cylinder locks. These locks shall be supplied and installed by the respective Contractor. These cylinder locks shall be purchased through the General Contractor's subcontractor for hardware after submission and review of the panel schedule as hereinafter specified.

G. Prepare a schedule showing location of all panels, cabinets, etc. to receive the Corbin lock. This schedule shall designate, by building and room number, the panel or cabinet location and shall be submitted to the Architect. This schedule is required for use in preparation of keying information. Locks shall not be purchased prior to review of this schedule.

1.16 SLEEVES, PIPE AND CONDUIT INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide and assume responsibility for the location and maintenance in proper position of all sleeves, inserts, and anchor bolts required for the work. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done without additional cost to the Owner.

B. All pipes and conduits passing through all walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation enclosing the pipe or conduit. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe.

C. Sleeves through foundation walls shall be James B. Clow & Sons № F-1430 or F-1435 cast iron wall sleeve with intermediate integral flange. Sleeves shall be set with ends flush with each face of wall. The space between sleeve and pipe shall be packed with a mechanical rubber seal, such as "Link Seal" manufactured by Thunderline Corp., (VICO) and then with oakum to within 2" of each face of the wall. The remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with a waterproof compound.

D. Sleeves through concrete floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, set flush with finished wall surfaces, but extending 1" above finished floors. The open sleeve space shall be packed with non-combustible materials.

E. Sleeves through non-masonry partitions shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel, set flush with finished surfaces of partitions.

Page 35: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 12 of 23

F. Inserts shall be preset concrete inserts with steel reinforced rods through the insert and both ends hooked over the reinforced mesh. Inserts shall be of individual type of malleable iron construction with accommodation for removable nuts and threaded rods up to ¾" diameter, permitting lateral adjustment, except as otherwise noted. Individual inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 279 up to 5" pipe and conduit, Fig. 282, 6" and up to 8" pipe and conduit, Fig. 152 above 8" and up to 12" pipe and conduit. For figures 282 and 152, they shall come with an opening at the tip to allow reinforcing rods up to ½" diameter to be passed through the insert body. Rods shall extend a minimum of 4" on either side of the insert. Pipes larger than 12" shall be suspended from steel members only.

G. In general, all piping and conduit shall be supported from structural steel building members only or approved malleable steel inserts imbedded in concrete pours. Concentrated loads up to _______ lbs. can use inserts in concrete. All other loads shall be hung from steel building members. Inserts shall not be located in the same deck flute as ceiling tabs nor within 2 feet in any direction from ceiling tabs. Inserts shall not be spaced closer than 4 feet on center in all directions.

H. Where layout revisions are required, and are approved after concrete deck is poured, piping conduit 3" and smaller may be supported at Intermediate Points by Phillips' ¾" expansion bolts with lead shields, provided main supports are welded to structural steel and are not more than twenty feet on centers.

I. The Contractor shall have the option of providing 18 gauge sheet metal sleeves in lieu of Schedule 40 steel pipe.

J. Piping and conduit 3" and smaller shall be supported from existing slab by "Phillips" ¾ expansion bolts with lead shields. Piping 4" and larger shall be supported by means of 4" x 4" x ⅜" clip knee angle with ¾" expansion bolt in shear and supporting rod at 90̊ from another bolt or using two expansion bolts per hanging post - pipes 8' and larger shall be supported from steel building members. In concrete buildings, add supplementary steel tied into the concrete structural members. Support such piping, conduits and ductwork from the supplementary steel.

K. Provide sleeves for pipes passing through roofs. Sleeves passing through roofs shall be as detailed on drawings extending min. 12" above finished roof. All pipes passing through roof shall be minimum of 10" from walls or other construction to permit proper flashing. Provide counter flashing.

L. Where sleeves pass through waterproofed floors, they shall be IPS brass pipe sleeves of the required diameter, brazed at the bottom to 18" x 18", 16-ounce copper flashing for bond with waterproofing. The tops of the sleeves shall extend 1" above finished floor.

M. No ductwork, piping, conduit or equipment shall be supported from corrugated decking construction. For this area provide supplementary steel to support ductwork, piping, conduit or equipment. Supplemental steel members shall be welded to building structural steel.

Page 36: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 13 of 23

N. All hangers, rods and supports shall be installed prior to construction fireproofing.

O. The required fire resistance rating of floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and walls shall be maintained where a penetration is made for electrical, mechanical, plumbing pipes, conduits, ducts and systems. Fire stopping shall be provided at openings around vents, pipes, ducts, conduits at floor levels and walls with non-combustible materials. For openings around pipes and conduits and/or sleeves, 3M product Caulk CP 25 and Putty 303 or approved equal shall be provided.

1.17 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide escutcheons on pipes wherever they pass through ceilings, walls, or partitions.

B. Escutcheons or pipes passing through outside walls shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 1, solid, cast brass, flat type secured to pipe with set screw.

C. Escutcheons for pipes passing through floors shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 36A, split-hinged, cast brass type, designed to fit pipe on one end and cover sleeve projecting through floor on the other end.

D. Escutcheons for pipes passing through interior walls, partitions, and ceilings shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 3A, split-hinged, cast brass chromium plated type.

1.18 MANUFACTURERS' IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer's nameplate, name or trademark, shall be permanently affixed to all equipment and material furnished under this Specification. Where such equipment is in a finished occupied space, the nameplate shall be in a concealed but accessible location. The nameplate of a Subcontractor or Distributor will not be acceptable.

1.19 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Provide for each item of equipment, including panelboards, disconnects, breakers, starters, switches, and all control devices, pumps, fans, compressors, boilers, etc., a permanently attached nameplate made of black surface, white core laminated bakelite with incised letters. Subcontractor furnishing equipment shall provide nameplate. Pneumatic, electric and mechanically actuated gauges shall have a brief, but complete description of their function. Stating the air pressure or voltage range alone is not acceptable. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 3" long by 1½" wide and shall bear the equipment name and item number (tag number) in ½" high white letters as designated in the equipment schedule. Nameplates shall be attached to their respective equipment by screws or rivets.

1.20 TAGS AND CHARTS

A. Furnish and attach to each valve as hereinafter specified, a 1½" diameter brass tag with ½" indented numerals filled with durable black compound. Tags shall be securely attached to stems of valves with wire and "S" hooks.

Page 37: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 14 of 23

B. Valve charts shall consist of schematic drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing the function. Upon completion of the work, one (1) copy of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be hung in a conspicuous location in the main equipment room, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Two (2) additional unmounted copies in 8½" x 11" leather ring binders shall be delivered to the Architect. Also furnish three (3) copies of schematic flow chart with corresponding valve numbers noted on chart.

C. Provide tags for the following valves: 1. Zone control, bypass, shut-off, check and balancing valves. 2. Building and area shut-off and balancing valves. 3. Control, by-pass, shut-off, balancing and drain valves for major pieces of

equipment such as boilers, domestic hot water heaters, heat exchangers, refrigeration machines, pumps, heating, ventilating and air conditioning units, cooling towers, etc.

4. System drain valves, safety and relief valves. Vacuum breakers.

1.21 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification shall be in accordance with "Scheme for Identification of Piping System ANSI A13.1" and OSHA safety color regulation.

B. Markers shall be snap-on type as manufactured by Craftmark, Fort Worth, TX or Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, CT (Setmark System), or Bunting Stamp Co. Inc., Pittsburgh, PA or approved equal. Markers shall completely encircle the pipe with a substantial overlap. No adhesive shall be used. They shall be manufactured of U.L. approved, self-extinguishing plastic. When the pipe, including insulation (if any), is larger than 4 inches diameter, markers shall be strap-on type. For piping located outdoors, all markers shall be strap-on type for all pipe diameters. Markers for medical gas piping shall be by means of metal tags, stenciling, stamping or with adhesive markers, in a manner which is not readily removable.

C. Provide identification for piping, ductwork and conduit for electrical work.

D. All piping and ductwork shall be labeled, whether concealed above ceilings or exposed. Labels shall be installed at intervals no greater than 15 feet (unless noted otherwise) and shall be installed after every turn or elbow. Where concealed above ceilings, a minimum of one (1) label shall occur above each room. Due to various above ceiling visual obstructions, the Engineer reserves the right to request additional labels in order to ensure visibility, at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Exposed conduits for alarm and communication systems shall be banded at intervals of not over 10 feet. Bands shall be of the following colors: 1. Fire Alarm System .................................................................................... Red 2. Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory System .............................. Red & Yellow 3. Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmen's Report System .................. Red & Blue 4. Watchmen's Report System ...................................................................... Blue 5. Security System ......................................................................... Blue & Yellow

Page 38: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 15 of 23

6. Civil Defense System ............................................................................ Yellow 7. Clock System ......................................................................................... Green 8. Mechanical & Electrical Supervisory System ............................... Green & Blue 9. Telephone System .................................................................. Green & Yellow

F. HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters two inches high, stenciled at 10-foot intervals over a continuous painted orange background.

G. Except where other means of identification are specified, electric cabinets, switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, system control boards, disconnecting switches, remote control switches, individual motor starters and motor control pushbutton stations shall be stenciled to show the service and number, if any, of the equipment controlled, as appropriate. Panelboards and other electrical equipment located in finished areas, such as offices, shall have the identification placed on the inside of the cabinet doors.

H. Cabinets housing 460Y/265 Volt panelboards shall have "460/265 volt" stenciled in 2-inch high yellow letters on the inside of the cabinet doors.

I. Cabinet housing emergency lighting panelboards shall have the word "EMERGENCY" stenciled in 2-inch high red letters on the outside of the cabinet, in addition to other lettering required above.

J. The bolted covers of housings for disconnecting switches or links in bus ducts between network transformers and switchboards shall be lettered to identify the equipment within.

K. Serial numbers shall be stenciled on the tanks and covers of transformers having their nameplates attached to the high voltage switch chamber covers.

L. Signs for Equipment Controlled through the BAS: For all fans, pumps and other motor driven equipment with start/stop control through the BAS provide a red surface, white core laminated bakelite sign with incised letters, permanently mounted on the equipment indicating, “Warning. This Equipment Is Started and Stopped Automatically from the Building Automation System.”

1.22 QUIET OPERATION

A. All equipment and material shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which in the opinion of the Architect is objectionable. Where sound or vibration conditions arise which are considered objectionable by the Architect, eliminate same in a manner reviewed by the Architect.

1.23 RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. See to it that the project is at all times maintained free of all rubbish, rubble, waste material, packaging materials, etc. accumulating as a result of his work. Assume responsibility for the cleaning up of packaging removed from materials and equipment furnished by other trades for the installation. Note that final acceptance of the work is

Page 39: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 16 of 23

contingent upon the project being free of all excess and waste materials resulting from the work.

B. Clean all parts of the building exterior spaces and adjacent roads, sidewalks, and pavement, free from material and debris resulting from the execution of the work. Debris resulting from interior construction shall be neatly stacked on each floor near elevators, material hoists and rubbish chutes, as directed by the Architect or his representative. Debris resulting from exterior construction shall be similarly stacked. All debris so stacked will be removed under other Sections. Excess material will not be permitted to accumulate either on the interior, exterior or on sidewalk.

1.24 CLEANING, PIPING, DUCTS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Clean all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation.

B. If any part of a system should be stopped by foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. During construction, properly cap all pipes and equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc.

1.25 DELIVERY OF MATERIAL

A. Deliver the material and store same in spaces indicated by the Architect and assume full responsibility for damage to structure caused by any overloading of the material.

1.26 CUTTING AND PATCHING (IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION)

A. All cutting and patching shall be done under another Section. Furnish the sizes and locations of all chases and openings required for the installation for his work before the walls, floors and partitions are built.

B. As a general rule, chases, shafts and wall openings as shown on the Drawings will be provided for most of the ducts and pipings, but promptly arrange with the Construction Supervisor for additional openings should any be required for the work.

C. Provide the labor and materials for all work included under the Contract or Subcontract in ample time and sufficient quantities so that all of the work of the Contract or Subcontract may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of the floors and walls.

D. Any cutting and patching required due to the failure to comply with the above provisions, shall be done at no extra cost to Owner. Such cutting and patching shall be done under Division One, as approved by the Architect.

Page 40: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 17 of 23

E. Where existing piping or ductwork insulation are damaged by the requirements of the work, replace all damaged insulation to match existing.

F. Refer to Paragraph: "Sleeves, Inserts and Anchor Bolts" for additional requirements.

G. Prior to performing any core drilling or cutting of existing floor or roof slabs, Contractor shall perform a scan of the slab using ground penetrating radar (GPR) to confirm that there are no existing conduits or pipes in area of core drill or cutting of slab.

1.27 ALTERATIONS

A. When new work and alterations render equipment, piping and ductwork useless, such equipment, piping and ductwork when exposed to view, shall be removed and connections thereof to lines or ducts remaining shall be properly capped or plugged and left in construction. If construction, such as hung ceiling, furred beam, chase, etc., is opened up and removed during the course of the construction, the useless pipe and ducts therein shall be treated as though exposed to view. When required to accommodate new work, useless piping and ductwork concealed in construction shall be treated as though exposed to view.

B. When existing piping and duct systems, at points of connection to new work or in rerouting are found defective, such defective portions shall be removed and replaced with new materials without cost to the Owner.

C. Provide temporary supports where required.

D. Where alterations reveal piping, ductwork, conduit circuits, wiring, and accessories that must necessarily remain in service, same shall be rerouted, replaced or altered as required to make same completely concealed in the new work at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Where existing piping or ductwork insulation is damaged by the requirements of the work, replace all damaged insulation to match existing.

F. Cutting in existing building shall be done by each Contractor as reviewed by the Architect. Rough patching shall be done by each Contractor. Finish patching, ceiling construction removal, new ceiling in existing building will be done under another Section.

G. Final grading shall be done under other Sections of the Specifications.

1.28 PAINTING

A. All finish painting is specified under other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Painting Schedule 1. No on-site painting is required on the following items unless specifically indicated

otherwise: a. Stainless steel or monel sheet metal. b. Stainless steel or monel piping.

Page 41: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 18 of 23

c. Piping or ductwork to be insulated. d. Insulation on piping or ductwork in unfinished spaces or concealed. e. Insulated piping covered with stainless steel, aluminum or all service

jacketing, unless otherwise specified. f. Insulated piping in walk-in and non-walk-in tunnels. g. Mechanical equipment with a factory applied baked-on enamel finish, not

specified to be insulated or provided with an enameled steel insulated jacket.

h. Insulated equipment or smoke stacks specified or noted on the Drawings to be covered with stainless steel or aluminum sheet metal jacketing.

i. Factory fabricated multi-wall metal smoke flue piping. j. Concealed piping.

2. Paint the following: a. Uninsulated Black Steel Piping:

1) Exposed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel.

2) Exposed in Unfinished Rooms, or Unfinished Spaces, or in Pipe Shafts: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of finish.

3) Exposed Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel.

b. Uninsulated Galvanized, Cast Iron, Brass or Copper Piping: 1) Exposed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and

2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. 2) Exposed Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of

exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel. 3) Exposed in Unfinished Rooms or Unfinished Spaces: 1 coat of primer

and 2 coats of finish. c. Piping in floor trenches after fabrication: primer and finish. d. Uninsulated Mechanical Equipment:

1) Furnished with a Factory Applied Prime Coat Finish: 2 coats of acrylic latex semi-gloss enamel. No primer required.

e. Vessels, Tanks, and Like Equipment Specified to be Insulated: l coat of corrosion resistant paint, prior to the application of insulation.

f. Uninsulated Exposed Iron and Steel Surfaces of Boilers, Including the Steel Casing, Buck Stays, Boiler Fronts, Castings, Smoke Pipes, Breeching and the Exposed Surfaces of all Other Iron or Steel Installed in Conjunction with Boiler Work: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of heat resistant enamel.

g. Hangers, Supports and Accessories: 1) Exposed: Paint to match adjacent piping, pipe insulation or ductwork

insulation. 2) All black steel or iron pipe hangers, rods, inserts, brackets and

accessories for supporting piping systems and duct systems: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. Paint black steel hanger rods, threaded on the job site, with a primer immediately after installation.

3) Metal Fabrications in Finished Spaces: Paint over shop coat with 2 coats of alkyd gloss enamel.

Page 42: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 19 of 23

h. Sheet Metal Work: 1) Exposed Black Iron, Galvanized Iron, and Aluminum, including

Hangers for Insulated and Uninsulated Ductwork, in Finished Rooms, Finished Spaces or Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel.

2) Jacketing on Exposed Insulated Ductwork in Finished Rooms and Finished Spaces: 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. No primer required.

i. Uninsulated Exposed Valves, Flanges, Unions and Irregular Surfaces in Piping Systems Installed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 1 coat of black heat resistant enamel.

j. Convector enclosures shall be painted at the factory as specified in Section 15835: Convectors.

k. Underground pipe, ducts and conduits - two coats of black asphaltum paint.

C. Color Coding: 1. Apply finish paints of colors indicated opposite the various items listed below

where such items are installed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Machine Rooms, Boiler Rooms, Penthouse Mechanical Equipment Rooms:

2. Piping, Exposed - Bare and Insulated on Unfinished Spaces and Rooms: a. Fuel Oils ......................................................................................... Yellow b. Pneumatic Tube Systems ................................................................ Green c. Steam Supply (all pressures) .......................................................... Yellow d. Steam Condensate Returns ........................................................... Orange e. Water - Boiler Make Up .......................................................... Light Green f. Water - Boiler Feed ........................................................................ Orange g. Water - Blow Off ............................................................................ Orange

3. Piping Not Listed Above: Color code by classification as follows: a. Fire Protection .................................................................................... Red b. Dangerous Materials ...................................................... Yellow or Orange c. Safe Materials .................................................................................. Green d. Valuable Materials ...........................................................................Purple

4. Ductwork: Grey. 5. Equipment - Bare and Insulated (Except Factory Painted): Grey.

D. The inside of all ductwork where visible through openings shall be painted with two prime coats of flat black paint.

E. Nameplates on all equipment shall be cleaned and left free of paint. Where equipment is to be painted, the Contractor shall carefully mask of all equipment nameplates and data tags prior to application of paint. Such masking shall be removed after paint has dried.

F. All lead bends and lead safes and flashing shall be painted with two coats of waterproof black asphaltum varnish.

Page 43: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 20 of 23

1.29 TESTS

A. All piping, wiring, and equipment shall be tested as specified under the various sections of the work. Labor, materials, instruments and power required for testing shall be furnished under the particular Section of the Specifications.

B. Tests shall be performed satisfaction of the Architect. The Architect will be present at such test, when he deems necessary and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.

C. Pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment and installation of insulation. In no case shall piping, equipment, or accessories be subjected to pressure exceeding their rating.

D. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the review of the Architect.

E. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Architect.

F. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the time prescribed in each Section of the Specifications.

G. Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment, systems, and their controls. Whenever the equipment or system under test is interrelated with and depends upon the operation of other equipment, systems and controls for proper operation, functioning, and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system being tested.

H. The electrical work shall include providing any assistance (such as removal of switchboard and panelboard trims and covers, pull and junction box covers, etc.) deemed necessary by the Architect to check compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.30 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the Contract that all work installed will be free from any and all defects and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified, and that if during a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of work, one (1) entire heating and cooling season or eighteen (18) months from date of shipment, whichever is later, any such defects in workmanship, material or performance. He shall immediately replace, repair, or otherwise correct the defect or deficiency, including parts, labor and travel time, without cost to the Owner within a reasonable time. Notify the Architect in writing of the time required to do work. For heating systems the guarantee period must include one continuous heating season

Page 44: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 21 of 23

from November 1st to April 1st. For cooling systems the guarantee period must include one continuous cooling season from May 1st to October 1st.

B. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner any and all damage done to the building or its contents or to the work of other trades in consequence of work performed in fulfilling guarantee.

C. This Article is general in nature and will not waive stipulations of other claims which specify guarantee periods in excess of one (1) year.

D. In the event default on this Guarantee, the Owner may have such work done as required & charge the cost to the Contractor.

E. The date of acceptance shall be the date of final payment by the Owner or notice of acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later.

1.31 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION

A. The Owner may require operation of parts or all of the installation for the beneficial occupancy prior to final completion and acceptance of the building.

B. The operation shall not be construed to mean acceptance of the work by the Engineer for the Owner. The Owner will furnish supervisory personnel to direct operation of the entire system and the Contractor shall continue to assume this responsibility until final acceptance.

1.32 SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION

A. As the project approaches completion, the Engineer and Architect, at their discretion shall determine a period of time in which they shall perform a Semi-Final Site Visit to observe the Mechanical and Electrical installation. At the conclusion of this Semi-Final Site Visit, a Semi-Final Punchlist shall be issued to the appropriate Contractor for the deficiencies in the work of his trade. Complete all work and perform all corrective measures as required by the Semi-Final Punchlist. After this corrective and completion work has been accomplished, in writing, advise the Architect and the Engineer that every item on the Semi-Final Punchlist has been completed. After the Architect and Engineer make a Final Site Visit to observe the Mechanical and Electrical installation and make a Punchlist, a similar letter of Compliance shall be forwarded through the appropriate channels.

Page 45: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work Page 22 of 23

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Installation/Operation & Maintenance Manuals and instructions. If other requirements of this Specification contradict what is stated in the Manufacturer’s instructions, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer for clarification. Any and all of the Manufacturer’s requirements for utilities (electrical power and control wiring, piped water, drain, gas, fuel oil, steam, condensate, etc.), ducted supply or exhaust air, mounting and support shall be provided by the Contractor, regardless of how, or whether or not stated elsewhere in the Contract/Bid Documents.

END OF SECTION 01 31 46

Page 46: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 47: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 1 of 10

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents, including but not limited to, the Drawings and individual Specification Sections and Contractor’s Submission Schedule, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01300 – Submittals, for submitting schedules and reports, includes

Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01700 – Project Close Out, for documents required to closeout

contract. 3. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require the Design Professional’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual specification sections as action submittals.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require the Design Professional’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual specification sections as informational submittals.

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

D. Contractor’s Submission Schedule: The itemized list of project submission requirements printed as a report from Contract Manager. The Contractor enters

Page 48: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 2 of 10

the date each item needs to be submitted in order to meet the CPM schedule and returns this document to the Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: The Contractor’s Submission Schedule is attached to this section, prepared by the Design Professional. The Contractor is to coordinate and cooperate with the Owner and Design Professional to arrange in chronological order by dates required by the construction schedule. Coordinate time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery to establish dates. Coordinate additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Design Professional and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate the Contractor’s Submission Schedule with list of subcontracts,

the schedule of values, and coordinated CPM schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit in accordance with start-up CPM schedule.

Include submittals required during the first 45 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently in accordance with the complete CPM schedule. a. Coordinate with the Owner and Design Professional revised

Contractor’s Submission Schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

B. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in electronic (PDF) file format.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Professional’s Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by the Design Professional for the Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with the performance of the Work.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery,

other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section

concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

Page 49: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 3 of 10

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals concurrent with action submittal.

b. The Owner or Design Professional reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on the Design Professional’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. The Design Professional will advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each re-submittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by the Design

Professional’s consultants, the Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

C. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title

block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block

to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by the Design Professional.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Design Professional. d. Name of Construction Manager (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall be the submittal item number and Submittal Package number designated in the Contractor’s Submission Schedule.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

Page 50: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 4 of 10

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

D. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links

enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision

identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record the Contractor's review

and approval markings and action taken by the Design Professional. 4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Design Professional. d. Name of Construction Manager (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Name of subcontractor. h. Name of supplier. i. Name of manufacturer. j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Other necessary identification.

5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Design Professional.

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless the Design Professional observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. The Design Professional will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than the Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use the Contractor’s office form. 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

Page 51: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 5 of 10

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Indication of full or partial submittal. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Transmittal numbered consecutively. l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. m. Remarks. n. Signature of transmitter.

3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on the Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by the Design Professional on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

I. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and format. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate

extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from the

Design Professional’s action stamp.

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from the Design Professional’s action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP

site specifically established for project.

Page 52: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 6 of 10

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one (1) copy of file as an electronic project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one (1) copy of

file as an electronic project record document file. 3. Closeout Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01700

– Contract Closeout Requirements and as listed in the Contractor’s Submission Schedule.

4. Permits, Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Permits, Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard

published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Submittal Package number and Submittal Item number. b. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. c. Manufacturer's product specifications. d. Standard color charts. e. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. f. Testing by recognized testing agency. g. Application of testing agency labels and seals. h. Notation of coordination requirements. i. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on

accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in electronic (PDF) file format.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.

Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Submittal Package number and Submittal Item number. b. Identification of products.

Page 53: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 7 of 10

c. Schedules. d. Compliance with specified standards. e. Notation of coordination requirements. f. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. g. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly

indicated. h. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as

accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the

following: a. Submittal Package number and Submittal Item number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in

individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: For turnover purpose, submit six full sets of

available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. The Design Professional, through the Owner, will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or

Page 54: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 8 of 10

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit six sets of Samples. The Design

Professional, through the Owner, will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a turnover sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least six sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by

subcontract. 4. Submit subcontract list in PDF electronic file, to the Owner.

F. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

G. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

H. OSHA Certificates: Upon the Owner’s request, submit certificates of the OSHA 10-hour Construction Safety and Health Course – S1537-A, for all laborers, workers and mechanics working on site.

I. Installer Certificates: Upon the Owner’s request, submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

Page 55: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 9 of 10

J. Manufacturer Certificates: Upon the Owner’s request, submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

L. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

M. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to the Design Professional.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of the Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL’S ACTION

A. General: The Design Professional will not review submittals that do not bear the Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: The Design Professional will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it through the Owner. The Design Professional will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: The Design Professional will review each submittal and will return it if it does not comply with requirements.

Page 56: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Page 10 of 10

D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from the Design Professional.

E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

3.3 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor’s Submission Schedule: The Contractor shall provide the dates each item needs to be submitted to the Owner no later than 14 days after approval of CPM schedule. The schedule shall include the date of all shop drawings, samples, materials that shall be submitted and the date approval is required. The Contractor shall adhere to the submittal processing time as describe in paragraph 1.5 above when developing the submittal schedule. The Contractor is to coordinate and cooperate with the Owner and Design Professional to complete scheduling in accordance with the approved CPM schedule.

END OF SECTION

Page 57: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 01 – Submittal Review Stamp Page 1 of 2

SUBMITTAL REVIEW STAMP SECTION 01 33 01

3 1/2”

END OF SECTION

5 ½

TO

BE

FILL

ED IN

BY

F.T.

A.E

.

TO B

E FI

LLED

IN B

Y TH

E C

ON

TRA

CTO

R

CONTRACTOR

FIT MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations - C1371

PROJECT TITLE

SPEC. SECTION NO.: ______________________________

Approved for conformance to contract requirements:

DATE:_______________ BY:_____________________

FLETCHER-THOMPSON ARCHITECTS-ENGINEERS FT PROJECT NO.: DATE RECEIVED:

NY16540 ______________________

COMMENTS MADE ON THE SUBMITTALS DURING THIS REVIEW DO NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIRECT SPECIFIC ATTENTION ON ALL SUBMITTALS, IN WRITING AND/OR GRAPHIC FORM, TO DEVIATIONS FROM THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, OR, ON RESUBMITTALS, TO ANY DEVIATIONS OTHER THAN THOSE REQUESTED BY THE ARCHITECT ON PREVIOUS SUBMITTALS. THIS REVIEW IS ONLY FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN CONCEPT OF THE PROJECT AND GENERAL COMPLIANCE WITH THE INFORMATION GIVEN IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONFIRMING AND CORRELATING ALL QUANTITIES AND DIMENSIONS; SELECTING FABRICATION PROCESSESS; TECHNIQUES OF CONSTRUCTION; COORDINATING THE WORK WITH THAT OF ALL OTHER TRADES; AND PERFORMING THE WORK IN A SAFE AND SATISFACTORY MANNER.

REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL NO.: REFERED TO:

____________________ ________________________

APPROVED REVISE AND RESUBMIT

REJECTED FURNISH AS CORRECTED

DATE: ______________ BY: ____________________

Page 58: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 33 01 – Submittal Review Stamp Page 2 of 2

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 59: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements Page 1 of 6

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 60 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in the Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedure, for product submittals. 2. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures (Supplemental)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work of the Contract and purchased new for the Project. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," and "system." 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name,

including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for

Page 60: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements Page 2 of 6

purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00

B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in

"Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information

or documentation for evaluation within one (1) week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify the Contractor through the Owner of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedure.

b. Use product specified if the Design Professional does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00. Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If the Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Page 61: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements Page 3 of 6

B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the Project site and to

prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time

for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to the Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or

counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger the Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in a

weather tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store foam plastic protected from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at project site for storage of

materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to the Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for the Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific

information and properly executed. Specified Form:

Page 62: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements Page 4 of 6

2. When specified forms are included with the specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to individual specification sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 – Submittal Procedure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and

other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or

nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. The Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," the Design Professional will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

7. Provide products that do not contain asbestos.

B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications include a procurement exemption approval

and name a single source, sole source, manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for the Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications include a procurement exemption approval and name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for the Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with

Page 63: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements Page 5 of 6

requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one (1) of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" article for consideration of an unnamed product by one (1) of the other named manufacturers

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches sample. The Owner's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with

other specified requirements, comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's full range", select a product that complies with requirements. The Design Professional will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: The Design Professional will consider the Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Design Professional may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Action Submittal shall be provided in accordance with Submittal Procedures

within 60 days after Notice to Proceed. 2. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the

Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

4. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

Page 64: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements Page 6 of 6

5. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of design professionals and owners, if requested.

6. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

Page 65: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching Page 1 of 6

CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01 73 29

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Responsibility: Each Contractor is responsible for the cutting and patching to permit installation or performance of Work of their contract.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Individual Specification Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of Work of the contract.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of Work of the contract.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: At each occurrence, describe cutting and patching, show how they

will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include

changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. Submit manufacturers' products literature, catalog cuts and data sheets for all products used in patching.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Design Professional’s Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching

proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

Page 66: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching Page 2 of 6

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Fire Rated Elements: Do not cut and patch fire rated elements (i.e. floors, walls, roofs, shafts, etc.) in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in decreased fire rating.

D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, which results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Design Professional’s opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

F. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including other trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

Page 67: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching Page 3 of 6

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that,

when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials, unless specified otherwise in other Sections.

C. Fire Rated Elements: Provide firestopping products/systems specified in system design listings by approved testing agencies that conform to the construction type, penetrating item, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate assembly. Refer to applicable Individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of

substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting or patching to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

Page 68: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching Page 4 of 6

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding,

not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after

completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend

finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or

other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and

intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

Page 69: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching Page 5 of 6

6. Fire Rated Elements: Install firestopping systems to comply with applicable Individual Specification Sections and firestopping manufacturer’s written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

3.4 REINSTALLATION

A. Where reinstallation of existing, remaining items removed during cutting is required, reinstall them to a condition equal to or better than their condition before removal.

END OF SECTION

Page 70: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching Page 6 of 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 71: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 1 of 8

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 01 74 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition: Disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of building components.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-project rates for recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all

Page 72: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 2 of 8

reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling of materials. 1. Demolition Waste:

a. Wood studs. b. Wood trim. c. Supports and hangers. d. Electrical conduit. e. Copper wiring. f. Electrical devices.

2. Construction Waste: a. Wood and wood trim. b. Metals from banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, conduit,

windows, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

c. Gypsum board. d. Paint. e. Glass/Mirrors. f. Plastics g. Tile h. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General"

paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates, palettes 7) Plastic pails.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within seven (7) days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use forms acceptable to the Owner. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste.

Page 73: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 3 of 8

3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage

of total waste.

C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

F. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

H. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recovery technician.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of

waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and

its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify

availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to

recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

Page 74: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 4 of 8

1.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E1609 and requirements in this section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Use forms acceptable to the Owner. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use forms acceptable to the Owner. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and

reused in this project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use forms acceptable to the Owner. Include the following: 1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees

and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.

Page 75: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 5 of 8

7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for

each type of waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in

Section 01500.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three (3)

days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-

site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on project site necessary for separating

materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 01500 for controlling dust and dirt, environmental

protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner.

Page 76: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 6 of 8

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable

waste until removed from project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove

contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other

materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling

receiver or processor.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

B. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and

length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

C. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and

store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove

pallets from project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

Page 77: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Page 7 of 8

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated

wood.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be

disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on

adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 MEETINGS

A. Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. Meetings shall include

Subcontractors affected by the CWM Plan. At a minimum, waste management

goals and issues shall be discussed at the following meetings:

1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. Regular job-site meetings.

3.7 MONTHLY WASTE MANAGEMENT REPORTING FORMS

A. Monthly Waste Management Reporting Forms, as required in the SUBMITTALS

Article above, shall be submitted to the Facilities Representative and Architect for

review throughout the duration of the project.

END OF SECTION

Page 78: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fash

ion I

nstitu

te o

f T

echn

olo

gy I

NF

OR

D

esig

n a

nd T

echn

olo

gy L

ab

Bu

ildin

g C

, F

eld

ma

n C

ente

r, 1

st

Flo

or

Pro

ject

C1

319

4/1

2/2

01

6

S

ection

01 7

4 1

9 –

Co

nstr

uctio

n W

aste

Ma

na

ge

me

nt

& D

isp

osa

l

Pa

ge

8 o

f 8

(Pro

ject

Nam

e)

(Exh

ibit “

A”)

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

C&

D W

AS

TE

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

FO

RM

For

Waste

Ge

nera

ted O

n-S

ite

Co

mp

an

y:

Co

nta

ct:

Ph

on

e:

Ma

teri

al

De

sc

rip

tio

n

(In-

clu

de

p

ackag

ing

w

aste

if

app

lica

ble

)

To

tal

Weig

ht

% R

eu

sed

on

-sit

e

% R

ec

yc

led

off

-sit

e

% S

en

t to

lan

dfi

ll

Ma

teri

al

Re

cip

ien

t

Re

cyc

led

Ma

teri

al:

Ma

teria

l th

at

wo

uld

oth

erw

ise

be d

estin

ed

for

landfill b

ut

is d

ive

rte

d f

rom

th

e w

aste

str

ea

m,

rein

tro-

duce

d a

s m

ate

ria

l fe

edsto

ck a

nd

re

pro

ce

ssed in

to n

ew

end

pro

du

cts

.

Re

us

ed

Ma

teri

al:

M

ate

ria

ls t

hat ca

n b

e r

euse

d in t

heir o

rig

inal fo

rm w

ith

ou

t a

ny r

epro

ce

ssin

g.

Page 79: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 1 of 8

SELECTIVE REMOVALS AND DEMOLITION SECTION 02 41 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Perform selective removals in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Removal of selected items to accommodate new construction 2. Removal of interior finishes and other items, to accommodate new

construction. 3. Protect existing items to remain. 4. The maintenance of the College’s operations during selective demolition

operations. 5. Protection of the cables and utilities serving other buildings and other areas

at the College Campus during the demolition and construction activities. The above services shall be maintained in operation without any interruption at all times unless otherwise scheduled and authorized by the Campus.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

B. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching

C. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Construction waste management plan.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled, or to remain the College's property.

Page 80: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 2 of 8

B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the College's property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to the College’s designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, clean, service or otherwise prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of

materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control, and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting

and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Use of elevator and stairs. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing

building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

Page 81: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 3 of 8

B. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities and injury to persons.

1. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

G. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent areas and facilities by demolition operations.

H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition

operations.

Page 82: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 4 of 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Fluorescent tubes shall be considered hazardous waste and shall be disposed of according to the regulations of the New York State EPA. 1. All demolition work shall comply with requirements of the College’s

operational requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with the College’s facilities department.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. Design for shoring and bracing shall be prepared by an engineer licensed in the State of New York.

F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

Page 83: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 5 of 8

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions

specified in Section 01 10 00.

B. Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except

when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities and/or the College.

C. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnections have been completed and verified in writing.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with streets, walks, corridors, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in General

Requirements.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective

demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to

remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been

removed. 4. Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or

collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. a. Cease operations and notify College Safety Officer immediately if

safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. Maintain interior and exterior shoring and bracing throughout the term of this Contract.

5. Use temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. a. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to

designated portions of the building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 3 5/8-inch studs at 16 inches on center, 5/8-inch drywall

Page 84: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 6 of 8

(joints taped) on occupied side, ½-inch fire-retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation. Create dust-tight joints at edges and penetrations of dust-proof partitions.

6. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as damage to finishes, flooding, and pollution.

7. Cover and protect equipment and fixtures from soilage or damage when selective demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed.

8. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of

service to designated areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to the College if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable

materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable

materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 4. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method

suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so

as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 2. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements

for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

Page 85: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 7 of 8

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from project site and legally dispose of them. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on

adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 1. Clean adjacent areas, of all dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition, cutting, and patching operations. Daily and final clean up shall be satisfactory to the Architect.

2. Clean existing heating and cooling devices to remain.

3.7 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Items to Be Removed: Refer to demolition drawings for scope of work to be removed .

END OF SECTION

Page 86: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 02 41 19 - Selective Removals and Demolition Page 8 of 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 87: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 03 36 00 – Concrete Floor Finish System

Page 1 of 6

CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM SECTION 03 36 00

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services

necessary to complete the finishing and polishing of concrete as shown on the

drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not necessarily limited to, the

following:

1. Sealer and hardener over concrete substrates.

2. Polishing concrete.

3. Dye base.

4. Repair and of surface defects

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with a

minimum of 3 years experience and approved by the manufacturer of the product

used.

B. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-ups of each type finish and color, to demonstrate

typical joints, surface finish, color variation, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build mock-ups approximately 3’x3’, as directed by the Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-

ups will be constructed.

3. Obtain from the Architect approval of mock-ups before starting construction.

4. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed work.

C. Pre-Installation Conference

1. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and conduct pre-installation

conference at Project site to establish guidelines and expectations for

scheduling of floor treatment application stain color, degree of polish,

Page 88: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 03 36 00 – Concrete Floor Finish System

Page 2 of 6

concrete finish specifications, floor flatness, and similar issues. Ensure

attendance at Pre-Installation Conference by at least:

a. Owner’s Representative

b. Prime Contractor

c. Applicable Subcontractors

d. Certified Applicator

e. Floor Treatment Manufacturer’s Representative.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's specifications and test

data.

2. Submit special concrete finishes describing product.

3. Submit (2) 12" x 12" samples of the patching material with custom color and

RetroPlate finish for Architect’s approval prior to proceeding with site mock-

up.

4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive

data, curing time, and application requirements.

B. Mock-Up: 3’ x 3’ mock-up of final finish for Architect’s approval. Do not

commence work until Architect approves mock-up. Maintain mock up until floor

finishes of this section are complete.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section

before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of

all other trades.

B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and

replacements necessary.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to combustibility or flame spread requirements.

1.7 JOB REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and

moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other

conditions affecting topping performance.

Page 89: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 03 36 00 – Concrete Floor Finish System

Page 3 of 6

B. Concrete Floor Flatness rating recommended at least 40.

C. Concrete Floor Levelness rating recommended

at least 30.

D. Manufacturer of materials shall examine the concrete floor prior to application.

E. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time

period recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer/applicator Warranty: 10 years for labor and materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design: Subject to the requirements specified herein, provide

"RetroPlate 99" as manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., Ameripolish

Pro Guard Series -Stain Shield, and Ameripolish Dye, with the following

characteristics:

1 Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C 779 – Up to 400% increase in abrasion

resistance.

2 Impact Strength: ASTM C 805 – Up to 21% increase impact strength.

3 Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G 23-81 – No adverse effect to

ultra violet and water spray.

4 Coefficient of Friction per ASTM C1028 to be .05 or less.

5 Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in reflectivity.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Neutralizing Agent: Tri-sodium Phosphate.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Concrete Bonding Agent: LF Primer by CMP Specialty Products or approved

equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Page 90: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 03 36 00 – Concrete Floor Finish System

Page 4 of 6

3.1 SLAB PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall provide Masonite protection over entire concrete area that

has received floor finish.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions where concrete sealer, hardener and

finishing are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper

and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work.

B. Manufacturer’s representative must inspect surfaces to receive sealer and

hardener compounds approve those surfaces in writing to the Architect prior to

start of application.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION (TO BE PERFORMED SUCCESSIVELY):

A. Prepare concrete by performing three steps of machine grinding with grits

listed below. Between each step, contractor is required to remove excess

concrete debris using a HEPA vacuum.

1. Machine grind with 16 grit metal bond diamonds.

2. Machine grind with 30 grit metal bond diamonds.

3. Machine grind with 80 grit metal bond diamonds.

B. Prepare concrete by performing three steps of machine buffing with grits

listed below. Between each step, contractor is required to remove excess

concrete debris using a HEPA vacuum.

1. Machine buff with 100 grit metal bond diamonds.

2. Machine buff with 200 grit metal bond diamonds.

3. Machine buff with 400 grit metal bond diamonds.

C. Patch voids, cracks, and holes where depth (measured from existing concrete

floor at the time of the placement) is 1/8” or more. Install concrete bonding

agent to voids and holes for bonding of patching compound to concrete slab.

Patch with cementitious patching compound, Rapid Set Cement. Color to match

existing concrete to be approved by Architect.

D. Apply Retro-Plate 99 Densifier

1. Work the product into the floor for approximately one (1) hour.

2. Wet vacuum off any excess and dispose.

Page 91: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 03 36 00 – Concrete Floor Finish System

Page 5 of 6

E. Prepare concrete and patched areas by performing five steps of machine

polishing with grits listed below. Between each step, contractor is required to

remove excess concrete debris using a HEPA vacuum.

1. Machine polish with 200 grit resins

2. Machine polish with 400 grit resins

3. Machine polish with 800 grit resins

4. Machine polish with 1,500 grit resins

5. Machine polish with 3,000 grit resins

F. Machine burnish three (3) coats of oil protectant, Retro-Guard Protectant

on top of polished concrete and polished, patched areas.

G. Buff the entire floor after each coat.

3.4 GENERAL

A. Remove paint residue with solvent/stripper without acidic pH and acceptable to

floor treatment manufacturer.

B. Treat oil spots with aggressive solvent or oil emulsifier acceptable to floor

treatment manufacturer to remove oil that has penetrated below surface after

absorbing excess oil on surface using oil absorber acceptable to floor treatment

manufacturer.

C. Treat and marks in accordance with floor treatment manufacturer’s

recommendations, including application of treatment materials, scrubbing, and

rinsing.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. Install concrete sealer and hardener in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the product

manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample.

C. Concrete slab must be broom swept and completely uninhibited for application.

D. Apply compounds to achieve water repellency, hardening, dust-proofing,

and abrasion resistance of the surface without changing the natural

appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen.

Page 92: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 03 36 00 – Concrete Floor Finish System

Page 6 of 6

E. Polish to sheen level as per Architects approved mock up.

F. Apply oil protectant RetroGuard by Advanced Floor Products or approved equal.

3.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING

A. The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times.

B. Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces as necessary.

C. Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations.

D. Remove debris from jobsite. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers

in accordance with local regulations.

E. Protection of work area shall be provided to ensure no dust particulate debris

adheres to surrounding areas or overhead structures.

F. All grinding equipment shall include integral dust collection system with HEPA

filtration.

G. Contractor to erect containments with appropriate controls to prevent any

migration of dust from the work area that would result in concentrations of total

airborne dust that exceed more that 0.014 milligrams per cubic meter outside

work areas during contractor work.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces and until

underlayment is completely dry.

END OF SECTION

Page 93: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 1 of 12

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 22 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Miscellaneous replacement of Concrete masonry units.

B. Mortar and grout

C. Repointing unit joints with mortar

D. Steel reinforcing bars.

E. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

C. Sustainable Submittals 1. Submit Contractor’s Sustainable Materials Form with complete

information on recycled and regional content for materials. Include cost of all materials, distance in miles to point of materials extraction and manufacture and percentage, by weight, of materials that have post-consumer or pre-consumer recycled content for concrete masonry units.

Page 94: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 2 of 12

2. Submit documentation of recycled and regional content in concrete masonry unit materials – product data, mix design information, or manufacturer’s statement.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Colored mortar.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make samples using same sand

and mortar ingredients to be used on project.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and

type. 3. Mortar admixtures. 4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions

of ingredients. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement. 8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification. Test according to ASTM C109 for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

Page 95: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 3 of 12

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1093 for testing indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes

approximately 24 inches high by 48 inches long by full thickness, including and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from

the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

Page 96: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 4 of 12

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Concrete Masonry Units: Obtain units from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Aggregate for Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 1. Northeast Solite Corporation, Mt. Marion, N.Y. 2. Norlite Corporation, Cohoes, N.Y. B.

D. Reinforcement and Ties 1. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppage, N.Y. 2. Dur-O-Wall, Arlington Heights, IL. C.

E. Mortar Additives 1. ACM Chemistries, Norcross, GA 30010 2. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH 44122 3. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Base Materials 1. Portland Cement: Type I ASTM C150 2. Sand for Mortar Mix ASTM C144 3. Sand shall be washed natural sand with 100% passing the No. 8 sieve. Mix

shall not contain chlorides. 4. Aggregate for CMU - 100% light ASTM C331

Page 97: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 5 of 12

5. weight aggregate, expanded clay shale or slate (rotary kiln process). To meet recycled content, lightweight recycled aggregate of up to 20% of total material that will maintain the same fire resistance equivalent thickness of 100% expanded shale, clay, or slate without a decrease in block strength may be used.

6. Hydrated Lime ASTM C207 Type "S" 7. Water - Clean, potable New York City water free of injurious materials.

B. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 1. Types: Hollow Load-Bearing: ASTM C90, Type I. Aggregate shall conform

to ASTM C331 2. Size:

a. Nominal face dimension 8" x 16" or 8"x18", except as noted otherwise.

b. Unit weight: Unit weight of concrete for CMU not to exceed 90 pcf when tested in accordance with ASTM C140 (105 pcf for the high strength CMU)

c. Concrete masonry units shall be manufactured with a minimum of 3% pre- consumer content materials. A maximum ratio of 40% slag to Portland cement is permitted for cementitious materials and 20% recycled lightweight material (such as fly ash) to expanded clay shale, or slate for aggregate, as long as the required strength to meet ASTM C90 is met, the weights are the same, and the equivalent thickness to meet fire-resistance ratings is the same as block with 100% expanded clay, shale, or slate.

C. Concrete Lintels 1. General: Provide one (1) of the following:

a. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.

b. Concrete Lintels: Precast concrete lintels complying with requirements in Section 03 30 53, and with reinforcing bars indicated.

c. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

D. Joint Reinforcement and Ties 1. Material

a. Reinforcement and Ties for Interior Walls: ASTM A951, hot-dip galvanized (after fabrication), ASTM A153.

b. Width of truss and mesh reinforcement to place edge of reinforcement 1” from each face of masonry.

Page 98: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 6 of 12

2. Manufactured Units. Units are listed by Hohmann & Barnard model number in order to establish a standard for comparison. Deliver all units with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

3. Interior Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: LOX-ALL #120 Truss-Mesh, 9 gage, of proper width for wall thickness.

2.3 MIXES

A. Mortar: Shall conform to ASTM C270 and BIA M1-88. Provide Type I Portland cement (Type II Portland Cement when used for manholes). Masonry cement shall not be used as a substitute. Preconstruction testing with the proportions carefully monitored is to be used to establish the upper end of the strength range, which should generally be near the minimum strength of the next higher strength mortar. 1. Type N: 1 part gray cement, 1 part lime, 6 parts dry sand. Minimum

compressive strength shall be 750 psi at 28 days.

2.4 MASONRY-CELL FILL

A. Lightweight-Aggregate Fill: ASTM C 331/C 331M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Report to the Architect any conditions that prevent the performance of this Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other sections.

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

Page 99: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 7 of 12

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.3 MIXING PROCEDURES FOR MORTAR

A. Measure material by volume or equivalent weight. In measuring by volume, measure ingredients by container. Do not measure by shovel.

B. Mix ingredients in a clean mechanical mixer for a minimum of 3 minutes, maximum of 5, with the minimum amount of water to produce a workable consistency.

C. Mortar that has stiffened because of evaporation of water from the mortar may be retempered only once, and only during the first hour of placement to restore

the required consistency. Mortar shall be used within 21/2 hours after initial

mixing. Limit amount of mortar batched at one time to stay within these requirements.

3.4 LAYING - GENERAL

A. Lay units true to dimensions, plumb and level, square; exterior and interior bond work in bond indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Lay courses level with joints uniform; vertical joints spaced properly for plumb alignment. .

B. Fill bed joints and cross joints solid with mortar. Furrowed bed and spotted cross joints not permitted. For hollow block units, apply mortar full length on all bearing surfaces.

C. "Tooth" openings in masonry walls, to maintain proper bond when closed.

D. Rough cut joints in masonry that are to receive plaster, to provide good plaster bond.

E. Remove excess mortar, leaving masonry surface clean.

F. Cut concrete masonry units with circular masonry wet saw.

3.5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)

A. General

Page 100: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 8 of 12

1. Lay blocks with cells vertical. Provide running bond. 2. Where interior partitions intersect other partitions or walls, bond together

with metal wall ties spaced 2'-0" o.c. min., vertically.

B. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints 1. Make joints uniform and 3/8" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Shove vertical joints tight. 3. Tool joints flush where plaster is to be applied.

C. Exposed and Painted Surfaces 1. Smooth, even texture, free of chips, cracks, or other imperfections and free

from any material that will stain paint.

3.6 GENERAL - CUTTING, FITTING AND LAYING

A. Cut units for exposed Work with motor-driven carborundum wet saw; provide smooth, straight edges.

B. Provide necessary cuts to fit tightly in and around mechanical installations.

C. Where split block units are used to conceal piping or other installations, provide reinforcement for bonding the split units together.

D. Remove mortar protrusions that extend into cells or cavities which are to be reinforced and filled.

E. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

F. Set block up with special care for plane, jointing, pattern, and cutting.

G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

H. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

I. Keep faces of units clean; clean off mortar droppings on block face immediately. 1. Extend interior partitions to underside of slabs, beams. Leave sufficient

space between partition and slab/arch/beam to install firestopping materials where required. Install sealant to top of wall and at bottom of wall.

Page 101: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 9 of 12

3.7 LINTELS

A. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 REINFORCEMENT

A. General 1. Interior Concrete Masonry Units 2. Provide mesh continuous at every third block course.

B. Provide galvanized steel bent straps secured to slab, to brace tops of interior masonry partitions where required.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.9 REPAIRING AND POINTING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

3.10 REPOINTING

A. Rake out and repoint joints at locations of the following defects: 1. Holes and missing mortar. 2. Cracks that can be penetrated 1/4-inch or more by a knife blade 0.027-inch

thick. 3. Cracks 1/16-inch or more in width and of any depth.

Page 102: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 10 of 12

4. Hollow-sounding joints when tapped by metal object. 5. Eroded surfaces 1/4-inch or more deep. 6. Deterioration to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without

tools. 7. Joints filled with substances other than mortar.

B. Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.

C. Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup: 1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of 3/4 inch minimum to a depth that

required to expose sound, stable mortar. Do not remove unsound mortar more than two (2) inches deep; consult Architect for direction.

2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.

3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry units as directed by Architect.

D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

E. Pointing with Mortar: 1. Remove dust and mortar particles 2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to

depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8-inch until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.

3. After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8-inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry units have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.

4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.

5. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours, including weekends and holidays.

6. Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.

Page 103: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 11 of 12

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean wall surfaces to be painted; rub with carborundum stone: remove mortar from surfaces; remove rough edges from joints.

B. Point up holes and joints. Brush with stiff bristle brush. Leave surface in condition to receive block filler, primer, and paint.

C. Do not use wire brush.

D. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from project site.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be described as recycled and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

Page 104: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 04 22 10 – Concrete Unit Masonry

Page 12 of 12

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 105: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 17 00 – Support System for Suspended Ceiling

Page 1 of 6

SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS SECTION 05 17 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide structural ceiling suspension system as indicated on the Drawings and

as specified herein, for all suspended ceiling systems.

B. This suspension system shall include the attachment to overhead slab, steel

angle, plate hanger, and running (carrying) channels and supports.

C. Provide supports for furred areas, and for opening frames, lighting fixtures, furred

ceilings and other items.

D. Furring members and other attachments for the various ceiling materials

and systems shall be as specified in the respective Division 9 sections.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. List below only products and construction that the reader might expect to find in this section but are specified elsewhere. 1. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board 2. Section 09 51 23 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 106: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 17 00 – Support System for Suspended Ceiling

Page 2 of 6

1.4 REFERENCES

A. References and industry standards listed in this Section are applicable to the

Work. Unless more restrictive criteria or differing requirements are explicitly stated

in the Specifications, or mandated by governing codes or regulations, the

recommendations, suggestions, and requirements described in the referenced

standards shall be deemed mandatory and applicable to the Work.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. A36 - Specification for Structural Steel

2. A307 - Specification for low Carbon Steel External Threaded

Standard Fasteners.

3. A446 - Standard Specifications for Steel sheet, Zinc-Coated by the

Hot-Dip Process, Structural Quality.

4. A525 - Standard Spec. for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated by the Hot-dip Process.

5. A568 - Standard Spec. for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High Strength,

Low-alloy, Hot-rolled and Cold-rolled, General Requirements for.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings showing suspension assembly, indicating all

components, connections and anchorages.

B. Submit product data for all components, connections and anchorages.

C. Submit sample of anchor and descriptive literature indicating its characteristics;

submit laboratory report certifying pullout and shear capabilities for the anchor

embedded in the materials to be used in this Project.

D. Provide “Coordination Drawings” of all existing and new Work above suspended

ceilings. Such “Coordination Drawings” shall overlay ceiling grids and indicate all

penetrations and interferences with the ceiling height.

1. The “Coordination Drawings” shall be drawn at a scale of no less than

3/8” = 1’-0” and shall represent the coordinated Work of all the following

building elements (if required):

a. structure

b. ceiling construction

c. mechanical

d. electrical

Page 107: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 17 00 – Support System for Suspended Ceiling

Page 3 of 6

e. plumbing

f. fire protection

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. New York City Building Code, Appendix R

B. New York City Board of Standards and Appeals (BSA) approval, or New York City

Materials Equipment Acceptance (MEA).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Hangers and Clips

1. Steel Angle and Plate Hanger

ASTM A36. Provide angle 3" x 3" x 3/16” x 1" wide, with 1-3/8” long slot for

3/8" bolt. Provide plate hanger 1" wide x 1/8” minimum thickness, with

1-3/8” long slot for 3/8" bolt. Increase thickness of plate hanger where

required to support all loads suspended therefrom plus an additional 200

pounds located at midspan between hangers. Provide painted units at all

locations unless indicated otherwise.

2. 3/8” rods attached to ceiling with approved attachment.

B. Bolts

1. ASTM A307, 3/8" diameter, with lock washers and nuts. Provide shop coat

of paint.

C. Running (Carrying) Channels

1. Minimum dimensions: 1-1/2” deep x 7/16" wide flanges; S(in.3) = .0538,

I(in.4) .0404; 475 lbs. per 1000' painted; 508 lbs. per 1000' galvanized; and

As indicated on the Drawings. Provide galvanized channels for kitchen

ceilings. Provide shop painted channels at other locations unless indicated

otherwise on the drawings.

2. Increase size of channels where required such that midspan deflection, under

all loads supported therefrom, shall not exceed 1/360 of the span, in

accordance with the New York City Building Code. Loads shall include all

ceiling materials, lighting fixtures, and other equipment and items supported by

the channels.

3. ASTM A568 for painted channels.

Page 108: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 17 00 – Support System for Suspended Ceiling

Page 4 of 6

D. Anchors (hanger assembly to deck)

1. Manufacturers

a. Hilti Fastening Systems

b. Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

c. ITW Ramset

d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Stainless Steel or Galvanized

3. Anchors

a. Expansion bolt or powder actuated fastener of capacity indicated

below.

b. Threaded stud or internally threaded sleeve anchor of capacity

indicated below.

4. Safe working loads: For pullout 300 lbs. (minimum); for shear 300 lbs.

(minimum); for strength of concrete (minimum 3,000 p.s.i. lightweight

concrete). Provide increased pullout capacity as required to ensure that

each hanger is capable of carrying all loads suspended therefrom plus

additional 200 pounds loads located at midspan of running channels.

5. Isolators - Mason Industry 30 NCC. Precompressed 30N hanger with ceiling

channel clamps.

2.2 PAINTING

A. All steel members and accessories of the support system unless galvanized or

of stainless steel, shall be dipped or painted with one coat approved asphaltum

paint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Coordinate this Work with the various trades who may have ducts, pipes,

conduits, or other Work in the spaces above the suspended ceilings, in order that

anchors, hangers and running channels may be properly placed to avoid

such ducts, pipes, conduits, and other obstructions. Any changes required to be

made in the locations of anchors, hangers, and running channels by reason of the

Contractor's failure to observe this requirement shall be made by the Contractor

without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Coordinate Work with ceiling systems work

C. Provide “Coordination Drawings” of any Work above suspended ceilings.

Page 109: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 17 00 – Support System for Suspended Ceiling

Page 5 of 6

3.2 SUPPORT SYSTEM LOCATIONS

A. Provide support system: for all suspended ceiling systems and for enclosures

or furring systems indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Secure 3" x 3" steel angle to structural concrete deck or structural steel

with approved anchors. To accommodate the running channel layout space

anchors at 48" o.c. maximum in each direction, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Attach steel plate hangers to angle with 3/8" diameter bolt, lock washer, and nut.

C. Attach running channels to plate hangers with 3/8" diameter bolt, lock washer and

nut.

D. Install channels level, true to grid layout, at proper height, ready to receive the

ceiling system: furring members for lath and plaster or gypsum board. Provide

type of clip required to maintain indicated ceiling height in coordination with

clearances required for equipment above the ceiling.

E. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces

hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to

support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension

members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size

Supplemental suspension members and hangers shall support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced standards.

3.4 CEILING OPENINGS

A. Provision shall be made for the installation of lighting fixtures, ventilating or air

conditioning equipment, sprinkler heads, access openings, and other ceiling

openings.

B. Rigid frames of furring members shall be provided around openings,

adequately braced and reinforced.

END OF SECTION

Page 110: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 17 00 – Support System for Suspended Ceiling

Page 6 of 6

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 111: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 1 of 10

METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 50 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections.

B. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

C. Aluminum trim around tackboard surfaces

D. Products furnished, but not installed, under this section: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type

inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings. Comply with section for priming and finish paint.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material

surfaces.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

Page 112: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 2 of 10

B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

C. High Performance Building Documentation Submittals: 1. Product Certificates for products and materials required to comply with

requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

2. Product Data for primers and coatings. Provide documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

D. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and

their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Page 113: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 3 of 10

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one (1) another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A240 or ASTM A666, Type 304.

F. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304.

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26, Alloy 443.0-F.

Page 114: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 4 of 10

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593; with hex nuts, ASTM F594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where

item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Eyebolts: ASTM A489.

G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.

I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329.

L. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to

comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.

Page 115: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 5 of 10

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting sections.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.

E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength

and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

Page 116: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 6 of 10

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition shop drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Section 09 90 00 where indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in

concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 09 91 23.

Page 117: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 7 of 10

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123 for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with

paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

"Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09 Section "High-

Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

Page 118: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 8 of 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength

and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two (2) coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on shop drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

Page 119: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 9 of 10

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported

on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" article.

D. Install pipe or tube columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are

installed and leveled.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION

Page 120: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Page 10 of 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 121: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Page 1 of 6

ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wood blocking, nailers, furring, and grounds.

B. Miscellaneous Lumber and plywood.

C. Fire-retardant treatment for wood.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of two (2) inches nominal or greater but less than five (5) inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply

Page 122: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Page 2 of 6

with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

C. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

Page 123: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Page 3 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 1. Dimension lumber framing. 2. Miscellaneous lumber.

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by

DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified

above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

Page 124: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Page 4 of 6

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end

or back of each piece.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-

preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

Page 125: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Page 5 of 6

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four (4) times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633,

Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and

ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring] nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and

intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members,"

E. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install

Page 126: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Page 6 of 6

fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

END OF SECTION

Page 127: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 1 of 8

APPLIED FIREPROOFING SECTION 07 81 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

C. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-

resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

Page 128: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 2 of 8

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 degrees F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E119 or UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted

otherwise.

D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with low VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

F. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

Page 129: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 3 of 8

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Construction Products;

Monokote Z106 or Monokote Z106/HY. b. Isolatek International; Cafco 400AC or Fendolite TG. c. Or approved equal

2. Material shall be of the cementitious type (Portland cement based) with a density of at least 20 pcf (medium density).

3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E605, whichever is thicker.

4. Material shall comply with the following performance test criteria, which shall be tested and reported by UL or approved lab in accordance with the procedures of ASTM E119: a. Density: Dry density of material shall a minimum of 20 lb/ft3 or as

listed in the UL approval, whichever is greater. No reduction in average thickness is permitted when the density given in the approval is less than 20 lb/ft3 and provides the required fire resistance.

b. Deflection: Material shall not crack or delaminate from the surface to which it is applied when tested in accordance with ASTM E759.

c. Bond Impact: Material subject to impact tests in accordance with ASTM E760 shall not crack or delaminate from the surface to which it is applied.

d. Bond Strength: Fireproofing, when tested in accordance with ASTM E736, shall have a minimum average bond strength of 1000 psf and a minimum individual bond strength of 750 psf.

e. Air Erosion: Maximum allowable weight loss of the fireproofing material within a 24 hour period shall be 0.005 gm/ft2 when tested in accordance with ASTM E859.

f. Compressive Strength: The fireproofing shall not deform more than 10% when subjected to compressive forces of 10000 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E761.

g. Corrosion Resistance: Steel with applied fireproofing shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E937 and shall not promote corrosion of steel.

h. Surface Burning Characteristics: Smoke Development and Flame Spread Indexes of the material shall be 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

5. Material shall be tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and shall show resistance to mold growth when inoculated with aspergillus niger and mixed

Page 130: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 4 of 8

spore cultures (Tappi T487-M54 and ASTM G21). Mold inhibitor shall be added by the manufacturer.

6. Medium density sprayed fire resistive material shall be manufactured with a percentage of recycled materials. The sum of recycled pre-consumer and 1/2 post-consumer recycled content materials shall constitute a minimum of 3%.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one (1) or both of the following requirements: 1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance

design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds,

mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

Page 131: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 5 of 8

2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Verify that HVAC, plumbing, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

Page 132: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 6 of 8

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves,

and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with

applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks: 1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until

concrete topping, if any, has been completed. 2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has

been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

I. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied.

J. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

K. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

L. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

M. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's

written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further

treatment.

Page 133: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 7 of 8

3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.

4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture and neaten edges.

5. Skip-Troweled Finish with Corner Beads: Even, leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture, eliminate surface markings, and square off edges.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Testing laboratory will verify physical requirements and perform visual

inspections as required by Section BC 1704.

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections,

and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where

test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

Page 134: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing

Page 8 of 8

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.

END OF SECTION

Page 135: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 1 of 12

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07 84 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 23 sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.

B. Division 26 and 28 sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E814: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-

ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.

Page 136: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 2 of 12

b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems,

provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding four (4) inches in

width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E84.

E. Fire Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for through-penetration firestop systems tested per ASTM E119.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 5.1: Indicating the raw material extraction and

manufacturing locations and the distance to the project site. Include statement indicating costs for each product specified.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used in conjunction with firestopping systems, including printed statement of VOC content.

D. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and

inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by

Page 137: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 3 of 12

through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

E. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and,

where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop

design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

F. Qualification Data: For installer.

G. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.

H. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one (1) source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting

agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

Page 138: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 4 of 12

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

Page 139: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 5 of 12

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one (1) of the following manufacturers: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 3. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Firestopping products shall be manufactured within, and contain raw materials extracted within, 500 miles of the project site where feasible.

C. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing

materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.

Page 140: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 6 of 12

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.

K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other

horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. VOC Content of Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use in conjunction with sheet metal flashing and trim products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

Page 141: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 7 of 12

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items

foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

Page 142: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 8 of 12

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories,

and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within six (6) inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not

Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and

inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

Page 143: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 9 of 12

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty.

Page 144: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 10 of 12

d. Mortar.

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device.

E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Silicone foam. e. Pillows/bags.

F. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Pillows/bags. e. Mortar.

G. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Intumescent wrap strips.

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Mortar.

I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or both of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar.

J. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One (1) or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar.

Page 145: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 11 of 12

c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet.

END OF SECTION

Page 146: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 84 13 – Penetration Firestopping Page 12 of 12

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 147: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 1 of 12

JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 92 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Silicone joint sealants.

B. Urethane joint sealants.

C. Latex joint sealants.

D. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames: Sealing perimeter joints

B. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board: Sealing perimeter joints.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on project or, if not indicated, as directed

by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. For each sealant, test with and with-out required primer.

3. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

Page 148: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 2 of 12

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each

substrate separately; extend cut along one (1) side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two (2) 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified installer and testing agency.

G. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer, including Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

I. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

Page 149: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 3 of 12

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

J. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" article.

K. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

L. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with

requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this section.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits

permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant

manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been

removed from joint substrates.

Page 150: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 4 of 12

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Polyurethane 5 years / silicone 20 years.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors

attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one (1) another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Sealants shall be non-staining to porous substrates. Provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for project.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Provide sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, including at interior and exterior window joints and at gypsum board wall assemblies.

Page 151: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 5 of 12

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS (at window joints)

A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

B. Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation;NS Parking Structure Sealant. b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 NS. c. Pecora Corporation; 311 NS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.

C. One (1)-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. c. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS (at gypsum board joints)

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.

Page 152: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 6 of 12

e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Page 153: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 7 of 12

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with

adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other

means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

Page 154: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 8 of 12

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths

that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer

and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193, unless

otherwise indicated.

G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by

sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size

complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape.

3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.

Page 155: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 9 of 12

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.

H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one (1) test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one (1) test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each

substrate separately; extend cut along one (1) side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with

specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to

adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates

Page 156: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 10 of 12

during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, Non-sag, traffic grade, neutral curing.

3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, Non-sag, traffic grade, Class 50. 4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and

partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior

doors, windows, and elevator entrances. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex - siliconized based.

Page 157: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 11 of 12

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and

counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Single component, Non-sag, mildew resistant, acid curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location: a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. Standard non-sag, paintable, non staining latex sealant.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

END OF SECTION

Page 158: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Page 12 of 12

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 159: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 1 of 12

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Hollow metal doors and frames.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware:

B. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board.

D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coatings: for field painting hollow metal doors and

frames.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the authority

having jurisdiction.

1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames.

2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical

Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware

Reinforcing.

3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on

Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime

Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.

5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled,

Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy

Page 160: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 2 of 12

with Improved Formability.

7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip

Process.

8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel

Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building

Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.

10. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of

Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

11. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

12. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.

13. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel

Doors and Frames.

14. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire

Protection Association.

15. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.

16. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National

Fire Protection Association.

17. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

18. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, directions, and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. Coordinate anchorages, including sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to project site in time for installation.

1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site

Page 161: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 3 of 12

1.8 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-

resistance ratings, and finishes.

C. Sustainable Design Submittals: Submit Certificate for steel doors and frames with complete materials cost

information whether or not it contains regional content. This will be used to calculate default recycled content.

D. Shop Drawings: Include the following: Elevations of each door type. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal

thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including borrowed lights, dimensioned

profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.

F. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

G. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of not less than 3

by 5 inches.

1.9 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

Page 162: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 4 of 12

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source

from a single manufacturer wherever possible.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI

A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames".

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed

and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,

based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at

40” above sill) or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding

sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are

built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated

door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit

enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that

have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450

deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test

exposure.

D. Sound Transmission Class (STC) Rated Doors: Provide sound transmission

class rated doors fabricated as sound-reducing types with testing according to

ASTM E 90, and classifications according to ASTM E 413. Submit

manufacturer’s written results of STC ratings from testing performed by a

qualified independent testing agency for sound resistant doors see drawings for

required STC ratings.

F. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference with attendance by

representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods

and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify

installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or

access control hardware.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

Page 163: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 5 of 12

B. Deliver welded frames with two (2) removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field

measurements before fabrication.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair

or replacement of defective doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

1. CECO Door Products.

2. Curries Company.

3. Steelcraft.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),

Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),

Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial

Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

Page 164: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 6 of 12

D. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane

facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing

ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide 1-3/4” doors of design indicated, not less than thickness

indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on

exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that

complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with

requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and

model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Design: Flush panel.

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or

one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise

ratings indicated.

3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a

continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width

of the door and welded to the face sheet.

4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or

minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and

tapped.

5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with

reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

.6. Manufacturers Basis of Design:

a. CECO Door Products Legion Series.

b. Curries Company 707 Series.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and

profile.

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A

1008/A 1008M.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of slip-on drywall types, with

Page 165: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 7 of 12

"closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished

smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.

3. Frames for Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel

sheet.

4. Frames for openings up to 48 inches in width: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-

inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.]

5. Frames for openings 48 inches and wider in width: Minimum 14 gauge

(0.067-inch -1.7- mm) thick steel sheet.]

6. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch-1.3-mm-) thick

steel sheet.

7. Manufacturers Basis of Design:

a. CECO Door Products BQ/BU/DQ/DU/BR/DR Series (Drywall Profile).

b. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series (Masonry Profile).

c. Curries Company C/CM/CG Series (Drywall Profile).

d. Curries Company M/G Series (Masonry Profile).

C. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and

labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with

reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60

metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.

C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches

thick.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.

Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius

for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in

manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large

openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by

others.

Page 166: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 8 of 12

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in

ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit.

Factory install glazing where indicated.

2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets

in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where

required by NFPA 80 for fire- performance rating or where indicated. Extend

minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

C. Hollow Metal Frames:

1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to

shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each

joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and

make smooth, flush, and invisible.

a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily

attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping

and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to

size the frame opening.

3. Sidelight and Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face

seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten

members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

4. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for

exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide

security screws at exterior locations.

5. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in

frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.

6. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at

least four spot welds per anchor.

7. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.

and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.

b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.

and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

Page 167: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 9 of 12

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.

4) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and

mounted in metal stud partitions.

8. Door Silencers: Except on gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door

silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if

specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template

mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and

tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as

specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI

A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface

mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI

A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for

hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical

connections with Division 26 Sections.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to

insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed

to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate

free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria;

recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with

substrate and field-applied coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.

B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel

Page 168: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 10 of 12

door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike

height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.).

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed

finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area

smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames

for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness.

C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard

Steel Doors and Frames."

D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and

surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and

securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, sidelites, borrowed

lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI

A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely

until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and

frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with

installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that

extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling

space between frames and masonry with mortar.

4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has

been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed

mullion members.

Page 169: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 11 of 12

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at door rabbet on a

line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs on a

horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within

clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):

Maximum 3/4 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items

immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper

operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal

work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand

smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply

touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior

and galvanized openings) or finish paint.

END OF SECTION

Page 170: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

Page 12 of 12

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 171: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames

Page 1 of 6

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 31 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Access doors and frames for walls.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork

1.4 ALLOWANCES

A. Access doors and frames are part of an access door and frame allowance.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size.

D. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.

Page 172: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames

Page 2 of 6

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Provide coordination drawings to agent producing reflected ceiling coordination drawings of hung ceilings and support systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. Karp Associates, Inc. d. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. e. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Description: Door face recessed minimum of 5/8-inch for infill; with concealed flange for gypsum board, plaster installation and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall.

4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060-inch, 16 gage, factory primed and finished.

5. Latch and Lock: Flush Screwdriver or key operated; sufficient number to hold in door panel in flush, smooth plane when closed. One lock on each door panel shall be key operated, pin tumbler type. The remaining locks, if any, shall be screwdriver operated type.

Page 173: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames

Page 3 of 6

2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. Karp Associates, Inc. d. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. e. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.

4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction one (1) hour or two (2) hours.

5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036-inch, 20 gage factory primed and finished.

6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.

7. Latch and Lock: Flush Screwdriver or key operated; sufficient number to hold in door panel in flush, smooth plane when closed. One lock on each door panel shall be key operated, pin tumbler type. The remaining locks, if any, shall be screwdriver operated type.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A153 or ASTM F2329.

Page 174: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames

Page 4 of 6

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. Provide access sleeves for each latch operator and install in holes cut through finish.

E. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed.

2. Keys: Furnish two (2) keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

Page 175: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames

Page 5 of 6

2. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.

a. Color: As selected by Architect custom colors to match adjacent finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

Page 176: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames

Page 6 of 6

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 177: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 1 of 16

DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 00 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes furnishing and installation of door hardware for doors specified in

“Hardware Sets” and required by actual conditions. Including screws, bolts, expansion shields, electrified door hardware, and other devices for proper application of hardware.

B. Where items of hardware are not specified and are required for intended service, such omission, error or other discrepancy to be submitted to Architect fourteen calendar days prior to bid date for clarification by addendum.

C. Products supplied but not installed under this Section:

1. Electrified hardware will be furnished under this Section, but installed by the security contractor.

D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

E. Related Divisions: 1. Division 08 Openings 2. Division 26 Electrical 3. Division 28 Electronic Safety And Security

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts & Hinges (2006) 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices (2014) 3. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls – Closers (2008) 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks (2014) 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim (2010) 6. ANSI/BHMA A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions (2009) 7. ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Door Controls – Overhead Stops and Holders (2010) 8. ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches (2005) 9. ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware (2008) 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials & Finishes (2006) 11. ANSI/BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing Systems (2012) 12. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Keying Systems (2007) 13. ANSI/BHMA A156.31 Electric Strikes (2007)

Page 178: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 2 of 16

14. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames (2014)

15. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames (2006)

16. ANSI/BHMA A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swinging Door Assemblies (2003)

B. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute (ICC/ANSI)/ADA:

1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 1784 Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies 3. UL/ULC Listed

D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):

1. DHI Publication – Keying Systems and Nomenclature (1989) 2. DHI Publication – Abbreviations and Symbols 3. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 4. DHI Publication – Sequence and Format of Hardware Schedule (1996)

E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective’s 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 4. NFPA 105 Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies

F. Building Codes

1. NYC Building Code 2014

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Administrative

Requirements. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Organize hardware schedule organized in vertical format illustrated in DHI Publications Sequence and Formatting for the Hardware Schedule. Include abbreviations and symbols page according to DHI Publications Abbreviations and Symbols. Complete nomenclature of items required for each door opening as indicated.

2. Coordinate final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of hardware.

Page 179: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 3 of 16

3. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), as certified by DHI, who shall affix seal attesting to completeness and correctness, shall review hardware schedule prior to submittal.

C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheet on design, grade and function of items listed

in hardware schedule. Identify specific hardware item per sheet, provide index, and cover sheet.

D. Coordination: Distribute door hardware templates to related divisions within fourteen days of receiving approved door hardware submittals.

E. Electrified Hardware: Provide electrical information to include voltage, and amperage requirements for electrified door hardware and description of operation. 1. Description of operation for each electrified opening to include description of

component functions including location, sequence of operation and interface with other building control systems.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control system and differentiate between manufacturers installed and field installed wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic b. Point to point wiring diagram c. Riser diagram d. Elevation of each door

3. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control, security, and building control systems. 4. Provide junction boxes, relays and terminal blocks as needed for proper door

operations and connections.

F. Upon door hardware submittal approval, furnish for each electrified opening, three copies of point to point diagrams.

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit to Owner in a three ringed binder or CD if requested. 1. Warranties. 2. Maintenance and operating manual. 3. Maintenance service agreement. 4. Record documents. 5. Copy of approved hardware schedule. 6. Copy of approved keying schedule with bitting list. 7. Door hardware supplier name, phone number and fax number.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Listed and Labeled electrified door hardware as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

Page 180: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 4 of 16

B. Hardware supplier shall employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as certified by DHI and a member of the seal program who shall be available at reasonable times during course of work for Project hardware consultation. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced door hardware

supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance.

C. Door hardware conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1. :Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks and

operating devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

D. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and or labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fire Door Inspection: Prior to receiving certificate of occupancy have fire rated doors inspected by an independent certified Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI), as certified by Intertek (ITS), a written report shall be submitted to Owner and Contractor. Doors failing inspection shall be adjusted, replaced or modified to be within appropriate code requirements. Use for buildings under IBC 2009

F. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke and draft control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

G. Door hardware certified to ANSI/BHMA standards as noted, participate and be listed in BHMA Certified Products Directory.

H. Substitution request: Include the reason for requesting the substitution, clear catalog copy highlighting the proposed product and options, compliance statement, technical data, product warranty and lead time, to show how the proposed can meet or exceed established level of design function and quality. Approval of request is at the discretion of the owner, architect and their designated consultants.

I. Pre-installation Meeting: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.” 1. Convene meeting seven days before installation. Participants required to attend:

Contractor, installer, material supplier, manufacturer representatives, electrical contractor, security consultant and fire alarm consultant.

2. Include in conference decisions regarding proper installation methods and procedures for receiving and handling hardware.

Page 181: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 5 of 16

3. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware, inspect, and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. a. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

I. Within fourteen days of receipt of approved door hardware submittals contact Owner

with representative from hardware supplier to establish a keying conference. Verify keyway, visual key identification, number of master keys and keys per lock. Provide keying system per Owners instructions.

J. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in performing installation of this Section and have

five years minimum documented experience. K. Hardware listed in 3.07- Hardware Schedule is intended to establish type and grade.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide clean, dry and secure room for hardware delivered to Project but not yet installed.

B. Furnish hardware with each unit marked and numbered in accordance with approved finish hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each type of hardware.

C. Pack each item complete with necessary parts and fasteners in manufacturer’s original packaging.

D. Deliver permanent key, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to Owner shall be established at “Keying Conference.”

E. Waste Management and Disposal: Separate waste materials for reuse or recycling in accordance with Division 1.

1.06 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents

and be an addition and run concurrent with other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract documents.

B. Special Warranty: Warranties specified in this article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights. . 1. Ten years for manual door closers. 2. Five years for mortise, auxiliary and bored locks. 3. Five years for exit devices. 4. One year for electromechanical door hardware.

Page 182: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 6 of 16

C. Replace or repair defective products during warranty period in accordance with

manufacturer’s warranty at no cost to Owner. There is no warranty against defects due to improper installation, abuse and failure to exercise normal maintenance.

D. Maintenance Tool and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 HINGES

A. Hinges of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Products to be certified and listed by the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7

C. Butt Hinges: 1. Hinge weight and size unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:

a. Doors up to 36” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .134” and a minimum of 4-1/2” in height.

b. Doors from 36” wide up to 42” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .145” and a minimum of 4-1/2”” in height.

c. For doors from 42” wide up to 48” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .180” and a minimum of 5” in height.

d. Doors greater than 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .180” and a minimum of 5” in height.

e. Width of hinge is to be minimum required to clear surrounding trim.

2. Base material unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets: a. Exterior Doors: 304 Stainless Steel, Brass or Bronze material. b. Interior Doors: Steel material. c. Fire Rated Doors: Steel or 304 Stainless Steel materials. d. Stainless Steel ball bearing hinges to have stainless steel ball bearings. Steel

ball bearings are unacceptable.

3. Quantity of hinges per door unless otherwise stated in hardware sets: a. Doors up to 60”in height provide 2 hinges. b. Doors 60” up to 90” in height provide 3 hinges. c. Doors 90” up to 120” in height provide 4 hinges. d. Doors over 120” in height add 1 additional hinge per each additional 30” in

height. e. Dutch doors provide 4 hinges.

Page 183: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 7 of 16

4. Hinge design and options unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets: a. Hinges are to be of a square corner five-knuckle design, flat button tips and

have ball bearings unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets. b. Out-swinging exterior and out-swinging access controlled doors shall have

non-removable pins (NRP) to prevent removal of pin while door is in closed position.

c. When full width of opening is required, use hinges that are designed to swing door completely from opening when door is opened to 95 degrees.

d. Provide mortar boxes for frames that require any electrically modified hinges if not an integral part of frame.

e. When shims are necessary to correct frame or door irregularities, provide metal shims only.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Standard Weight Heavy Weight a. Hager Companies BB1279/BB1191 BB1168/BB1199 b. Bommer BB5000/BB5002 BB5004/BB5006 c. McKinney TA2714/TA2314 T4A3786/T4A3386

2.02 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Provide for use with type of locks shown on hardware schedule.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet the following:

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.31 Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators Grade 1 2. UL Tested 1500 lb. static strength. 3. UL listed for Fire Doors and Frames where applicable. 4. UL 1034 Burglary Resistance 5. UL10C.3H fire rated, 4’x 8’door

C. Material and Design: 1. To accept up to ¾” latch bolt and 1” deadbolt. 2. Field reversible, Fail Safe of Fail Secure 3. Dual voltage 12/24 VDC. 4. Tamper resistant, stainless steel corrosion resistance parts, and cast body and

keeper. D. Options: 1. Latch Bolt Monitoring (LBM) Signals the door is closed and latched or unlatched

and open. 2. Door Secure Monitor (DSM) Door secure and unlocked monitoring. 3. Deadbolt Monitoring (DBM) Signals deadbolt projected or retracted. 4. Plug in buzzer (BUZZ) Indicates Fail Secure strike is energized and unlocked. 5. Rectifier (RECT) Converts AC to DC

Page 184: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 8 of 16

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies 2930 series 2. SDC 3. RCI

2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Locks and latches of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet the following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000 Certified to Grade 1 for Operational and

Security. 2. UL/cUL Labeled and listed up to 3 hours for single doors up to 48” in width and

up to 96” in height. 3. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 4. ICC/ANSI A117.1.

C. Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in

hardware sets.

D. Material and Design: 1. Lock cases from fully wrapped, 12 gauge steel, Zinc dichromate for corrosion

resistance. 2. Non-handed, field reversible without opening lock case. 3. Break away spindles to prevent unlocking during forced entry or vandalism. 4. Levers, Zinc cast and plated to match finish designation in hardware sets. 5. Sectional Roses, solid brass material and have a minimum diameter of 2-7/16”. 6. Armor fronts, self-adjusting to accommodate a square edge door or a standard

1/8” beveled edge door.

E. Latch and Strike: 1. Stainless Steel latch bolt with minimum of ¾” throw and deadlocking for keyed

and exterior functions. 2. Strike is to fit a standard ANSI A115 prep measuring 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” with proper

lip length to protect surrounding trim. 3. Deadbolts to be 1-3/4” total length with a minimum of a 1” throw and ¾” internal

engagement when fully extended and made of Stainless Steel material.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Schlage L9000 series M52 lever

2.04 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. Touch pad type, finish to match balance of door hardware

Page 185: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 9 of 16

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified and or listed by the following: 1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 2. UL/cUL Listed for up to 3 hours for “A” labeled doors 3. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated 4. UL10B Neutral Pressure Rated 5. UL 305Listed for Panic Hardware 6. 2007 Florida Building Code Certification Number: FL9481.1 7. ANSI/BHMA A250.13 Severe Windstorm Resistant Component

C. Material and Design:

1. Touch pad shall extend a minimum of one half-door width. Freewheeling lever design shall match design of locks levers. Exit device to mount flush with door.

2. Latchbolts: a. Rim device – ¾” throw, Pullman type with automatic dead-latching,

stainless steel b. Surface vertical rod device – Top ½” throw, Pullman type with automatic

dead-latching, stainless steel. Bottom ½” throw, Pullman type, held retracted during door swing, stainless steel.

3. Fasteners: Wood screws, machine screws and thru-bolts.

D. Lock and Latch Functions: Function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer’s series and lever styles indicated in door hardware sets.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies: 4500 Series 2. Von Duprin: 99 Series

2.05 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Cylinders of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of

warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet the following: 1. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5 2. DHI Handbook “Keying systems and nomenclature” (1989)

C. Cylinders:

1. Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin conventional core. 2. Furnish with cams/tailpieces as required for locking device that is being furnished

for project.

D. Keying: 1. Copy of Owners approved keying schedule submitted to Owner and Architect

with documentation of which keying conference was held and Owners sign-off. 2. Provide a bitting list to Owner of combinations as established, and expand to

twenty five percent for future use or as directed by Owner. 3. Key into Owner’s existing keying Corbin system.

Page 186: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 10 of 16

4. Keys to be shipped to Owner’s representative, individually tag per keying conference.

5. Provide visual key control identification on keys.

E. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Corbin

2.06 CLOSERS

A. Closers of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. Unless otherwise indicated on hardware schedule, comply with manufacturer’s recommendation for size of closer, depending on width of door, frequency of use, atmospheric pressure, ADAAG requirements, and fire rating.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified and or listed by the following:

1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 2. ADA Compliant ANSI A117.1 3. UL/cUL Listed up to 3 hours. 4. UL10C Positive Pressure Rated 5. UL10B Neutral Pressure Rated

C. Material and Design:

1. Provide non-handed bodies with full plastic covers. 2. Closers shall have separate staked adjustable valve screws for latch speed, sweep speed, and backcheck. 3. Provide Tri-Pack arms and brackets for regular arm, top jamb, and parallel arm mounting. 4. One-piece seamless steel spring tube sealed in hydraulic fluid. 5. Double heat-treated steel tempered springs. 6. Precision-machined heat-treated steel piston. 7. Triple heat-treated steel spindle. 8. Full rack and pinion operation.

D. Mounting:

1. Out swing doors use surface parallel arm mount closers except where noted on hardware schedule.

2. In swing doors use surface regular arm mount closers except where noted on hardware schedule.

3. Provide brackets and shoe supports for aluminum doors and frames to mount fifth screw.

4. Furnish drop plates where top rail conditions on door do not allow for mounting of closer and where backside of closer is exposed through glass.

E. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility (ADDAG). Comply with

following maximum opening force requirements. 1. Interior hinged openings: 5.0 lbs.

Page 187: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 11 of 16

2. Fire rated and exterior openings use minimum opening force allowable by authority having jurisdiction.

F. Fasteners: Provide self-reaming and self-tapping wood and machine screws and

sex nuts and bolts for each closer.

G. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Norton 9500 series

2.07 PROTECTIVE TRIM

A. Protective trim of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and

consideration of warranty.

B. Size of protection plate: Single doors, size two inches less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and one inch less on pull side of door. For pairs of doors, size one inch less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and ½ inch on pull side of door. 1. Kickplates 10” high or sized to door bottom rail height 2. Mop Plates 4” high.

C. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for:

1. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 2. UL

D. Material and Design: 1. 0.050” gage stainless steel 2. Corners square, polishing lines or dominant direction of surface pattern shall run

across door width of plate. 3. Bevel top, bottom and sides uniformly leaving no sharp edges. 4. Countersink holes for screws. Screws holes shall be spaced equidistant eight

inches CTC, along a centerline not over ½ inch in from edge around plate. End screws maximum of 0.53 inch from corners.

E. UL label stamp required on protection plates when top of plate is more than 16

inches above bottom of door on fire rated openings. Verify door manufactures UL listing for maximum height and width of protection plate to be used.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies: 194S 2. Trimco 3. Burns

2.08 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and holders of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and

consideration of warranty.

Page 188: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 12 of 16

B. Wall Stops: Provide door stops wherever necessary to prevent door or hardware from striking an adjacent partition or obstruction. Provide wall stops when possible. Door stops and holders mounted in concrete floor or masonry walls have stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields.

C. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Convex Concave Floor 1. Hager Companies 232W 236W 241F 2. Rockwood 3. Burns

E. Overhead Stops and Holders: Provide overhead stop and holders for doors that open against equipment, casework sidelights and other objects that would make wall stops/holders and floor stops/holders inappropriate. Provide sex bolt attachments for mineral core wood door applications.

F. Standards: Manufacturer shall be certified by the following:

1. Overhead Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Grade 1

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Heavy Duty Surface 1. Hager Companies 7000 SRF Series 2. Glynn Johnson 90 Series 3. Sargent 590 Series

2.09 DOOR GASKETING AND WEATHERSTRIP

A. Door gasketing of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and

consideration of warranty.

B. Provide continuous smoke, light, or sound gasketing where indicated on hardware schedule. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications. 1. Perimeter gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and

frame. 2. Meeting stile gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are in

closed position. 3. Door bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold or floor when

door is in closed position. 4. Sound Gasketing: Cutting or notching for stop mounted hardware not permitted.

C. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for:

1. Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems: ANSI/BHMA A156.22 2. BHMA certified for door sweeps, automatic door bottoms, and adhesive applied

gasketing. (721)

Page 189: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 13 of 16

D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 105 listed, labeled, and acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control indicated. 1. Provide smoke labeled gasketing on 20 minute rated doors and on smoke rated

doors.

E. Fire-Rated Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 80 listed, labeled, and acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Perimeter Gasketing:

Adhesive Applied a. Hager Companies: 721S b. K.N. Crowder: c. Reese:

2.10 SILENCERS

A. Where smoke, light, or weather seal are not required, provide three silencers per single door frame, two per double door frame and four per Dutch door frame.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Hollow Metal Frame Wood Frame 1. Hager Companies: 307D 308D 2. Rockwood: 3. Trimco:

2.12 FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if within range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples.

B. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by ANSI/BHMA

A156.18 designations in hardware schedule. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

Page 190: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 14 of 16

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with: 1. NFPA 80. 2. NFPA 105. 3. ICC/ANSI A117.1. 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or

Steel Frames 6. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 7. UL10C/UBC7-2 8. Local building code. 9. Approved shop drawings. 10. Approved finish hardware schedule.

B. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on

substrates involved. Set unit level, plumb and true to line location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Material supplier to schedule final walk through to inspect hardware installation ten business days before final acceptance of Owner. Material supplier shall provide a written report detailing discrepancies of each opening to General Contractor within seven calendar days of walk through.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjustment: Adjust and check each opening to ensure proper operation of each item

of finish hardware. Replace items that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for application at no cost to Owner.

B. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per manufacturer’s instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer’s level of finish quality at no cost to Owner.

Page 191: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 15 of 16

C. Demonstration: Conduct a training class for building maintenance personnel demonstrating the adjustment, operation of mechanical and electrical hardware. Special tools for finished hardware to be turned over and explained usage at this meeting.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Leave manufacturer’s protective film intact and provide proper protection for all other finish hardware items that do not have protective material from the manufacture until Owner accepts Project as complete.

3.06 HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE

A. Guide: Door hardware items have been placed in sets which are intended to be a guide of design, grade, quality, function, operation, performance, exposure, and like characteristics of door hardware, and may not be complete. Provide door hardware required to make each set complete and operational.

B. Hardware schedule does not reflect handing, backset, method of fastening and like characteristics of door hardware and door operation.

C. Review door hardware sets with door types, frames, sizes and details on drawings. Verify suitability and adaptability of items specified in relation to details and surrounding conditions.

3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Heading 1 Door # 605 Each opening to receive Qty. Type Description Finish 6 ea. Hinges BB1191 x 4.5” x 4.5” 630 1 ea. Storeroom Lockset L9000 series M52 lever 626 1 ea. Mortise Cylinder Corbin 6-pin 626 1 ea. Electric Strike 2930-MOR 630 2 ea. Closer 5100 x 5035 689 1 ea. Overhead Stop 7016 SRF 630 6 ea. Silencers 307D GREY 1 ea. Floor Stop 241F 626 2 ea Lever Ext. Flush Bolt Rockwood 626 Power supply and card reader by Security Contractor

Page 192: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Page 16 of 16

Heading 2 Door # 607A and 607B Each opening to receive Qty. Type Description Finish 6 ea. Hinges BB1191 x 4.5” x 4.5” NRP 630 1 ea. Storeroom Lockset L9000 series M52 lever 626 1 ea. Mortise Cylinder Corbin 6-pin 626 2 ea. Closer 5100 689 1 ea. Gasket 721 CHARCOAL 1 ea. Overhead Stop 7016 SRF 630 6 ea. Silencers 307D GREY 2 ea Lever Ext. Flush Bolt Rockwood 626

END OF SECTION

Page 193: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 1 of 10

FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING SECTION 08 88 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire-rated glazing installed within rated hollow metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C1036.

1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Borrowed Lights.

B. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construc-

tion and Materials; 2011

2. ASTM E2074 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,

Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side Hinged and Pivoted Swinging

Door Assemblies; 2000

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

Page 194: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 2 of 10

1. ANSI Z97.1 - For Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Per-

formance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2009

C. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):

1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials;

2009

D. Glass Association of North America (GANA):

1. GANA - Glazing Manual; 2008

2. GANA - Sealant Manual; 2008

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013

2. NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Con-

struction and Materials; 2006

3. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012

4. NFPA 257 – Standard on Fire Tests for Window and Glass Block Assem-

blies; 2012

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 9 – Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies; 2009

2. UL 10B – Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2008

3. UL10C – Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies;

2009

4. UL 263 – Standard for Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials;

2003

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product, including installation and maintenance instructions.

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.

Page 195: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 3 of 10

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Qualification Data: For installers.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer verifying that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. 1. Certification submittals are not required for glazing materials bearing

manufacturer’s permanent label that designate type and thickness of glass, and labels represent a quality control program from recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Product Test Listings: Submit U listing indicating that fire-resistant glass complies with requirements based on comprehensive testing of products indicated.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Fire Resistance Rated Glass: Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable UL label certifying it for use in tested and rated fire resistive assemblies.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate with hollow metal doors and borrowed lights.

B. Deliver material to designated location on project site in manufacturer’s original packaging, undamaged, and complete with installation instructions.

C. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

Page 196: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 4 of 10

D. Do not expose fire-resistant glazing to temperatures greater than 120 degrees F or less than minus 40 degrees F during storage and transportation, as well as installation.

E. Do not expose non-polyvinyl butyral (PVB) side of glass to ultra violet light.

F. Do not leave glass temporarily held in frames without fixing of glazing beads and completion of capping silicone sealant.

G. Store sheets of glass vertically, do not lean glass against surfaces for support, ensure maximum of 6 degree declination from vertical.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Pilkington Fire Protection Glass North America; Product Pyrostop:

Pilkington North America, Inc.

Location: Toledo, Ohio.

Phone: (419) 478-0165.

Fax: (419) 478-0165.

www.pilkington.com/fire

B. Distributed by Technical Glass Products, Snoqualmie, Washington: 1. Phone: (800) 426-0279.

Page 197: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 5 of 10

2. Fax: (800) 451-9857 3. Email: [email protected]. 4. www.fireglass.com

C. Or Approved equal.

D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Clear, laminated, fully insulating fire-resistant safety glass for use in impact safety-rated locations such as doors, sidelites, and wall applications with fire rating requirements ranging from 45 to 120 minutes and passing hose stream test; for use in interior applications.

C. Fire-resistant glazing provides protection by effective blocking radiant and conductive heat, and maximizing natural light and visibility.

D. Passes positive pressure test standard; UL 10C.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing

Manual."

2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and UL labeled, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E119 or UL 263.

Page 198: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 6 of 10

B. Composition: For fire ratings equal to or greater than 45 minutes, glazing is composed of multiple sheets of high visibility light transmitting glass laminated together using intumescent type interlayers.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with UL certification label. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 degrees F temperature-rise limitation; and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

D. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 (Categories I and II).

E. Glazing assemblies for 45 minute and above fire rated assemblies are composed of the following glass: 1. Product: Optiwhite™ low iron glass as manufactured by Pilkington.

F. Interior Use Fire Resistant Glazing Properties 1. Glazing Type: 45-200 (Door Glazing)

a. Fire Rating: 45 minutes b. Glass Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) c. Daylight Transmission: 86 percent d. Weight: 9.2 lbs per sq ft e. STC: 40 dB f. Assembly: Doors

1) Maximum Exposed Area: 3,724 sq in 2) Maximum Exposed Width: 41 5/8 inch 3) Maximum Exposed Height: 89 3/4 inch g. Building Code

Marking: DOH-N-45

2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Non-combustible, one-part neutral curing silicone, medium modulus sealant, in accordance with ASTM C920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 with additional movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and applicable. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one (1) of the following:

Page 199: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 7 of 10

a. Product: Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant manufactured by Dow Corning Corp.: www.dowcorning.com.

b. Product: SilGlaze II SCS2800 manufactured by Momentive. Performance Materials: www.momentive.com

c. Product: Spectrem 2 manufactured by Tremco Inc.: www.tremcosealants.com

d. No substitutions are permitted. 2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

C. Glazing Tape: Provide closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam that is coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides with maximum water absorption of 2 percent by volume and compression of 25 percent to ensure air and vapor seal, and also non-combustible and flexible. Complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800

D. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

E. Setting Blocks: Hardwood that is suitably treated against humidity or calcium silicate; sized to width of glass by 4 inches by 3/16 to 1/4 inches thick

F. Spacers: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, adhesive-backed on one face only, tested for compatibility with specified glazing compound.

G. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of glass and gaskets.

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with installer present, for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for

Page 200: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 8 of 10

size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances, and edge damage or face imperfections.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.

B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from project site and legally dispose of off project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Protect glass edges and glazing tapes from damage during handling and installation.

H. Inspect glass during installation and report damaged glazing tape that could be detrimental to performance to manufacturer’s product representative.

Page 201: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 9 of 10

I. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, flush with sight lines and fitting openings exactly, and with allowance for stretch during installation.

J. Install setting blocks with edge block, located at quarter points of glass, no more than 6 inches from corners.

K. Install glazing vertically into fire-rated metal frames or partition walls with same fire rating as glass, and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.

L. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified.

M. Install glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing as indicated above.

N. Do not remove or tamper with special edge protection tape.

O. Do not allow direct contact between glass and framing material.

P. Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape.

Q. Do not put heavy pressure on glass through glazing beads, sealing profiles or glazing tapes.

R. Carefully trim protruding tape with sharp knife.

S. Apply cap bead of silicone sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, with bevel to form watershed away from glass, tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

T. Provide at least 3/16 inch of edge clearance.

U. Install glazing in vision panels of fire-rated doors in compliance with NFPA 80.

V. Install glazing so that UL and manufacturer’s labels remain visible and oriented properly per instructions after installation.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

Page 202: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 08 88 13 - Fire-resistant Glazing

Page 10 of 10

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial washaway from glass.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Deflection: Designed deflection of insulating glass units in their frame under the maximum potential design load should be less than the span of glass unit in millimeters divided by 300, or 8 mm, whichever of these two numbers is least.

B. Glazing pressure on glass edges shall be low and uniform, less than 20 N per cm edge length at border of pane. 1. Point loading of glass edges is not permitted.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact

with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of project not more than four (4) days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Page 203: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 1 of 8

PLASTER REPAIR SECTION 09 22 10

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to complete all plaster patching required.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. References and industry standards listed in this Section are applicable to the Work. Unless more restrictive criteria or differing requirements are explicitly stated in the Specifications, or mandated by governing codes or regulations, the recommendations, suggestions, and requirements described in the referenced standards shall be deemed mandatory and applicable to the Work.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest editions.

C 28 Gypsum Plasters C 35 Sand C 150 Portland Cement C 206 Finishing Hydrated Line C 631 Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering C 842 Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster C 897 Specification for Aggregate for Job Mixed Portland-Cement Based

Plasters C 926 Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster

C. American National Specifications Institute (ANSI), latest edition. A 42.1 Portland Cement Lime Plastering Exterior and Interior

D. Gypsum Construction Handbook, USG Corporation, latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

Page 204: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 2 of 8

B. Product Data : Provide manufacturers' specifications and application instructions for each type of material specified, including the following: 1. Plaster 2. Bonding Compound 3. Plaster Accessories 4. Hydrated Lime 5. Aggregates for Base Coat Plaster

C. Quality Control Submittals 1. Certificates: Provide material certificates from Manufacturers, Material

supplier, and Contractor certifying that each material complies with, or exceeds the specified requirements.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Installers affidavit certifying a minimum of five years experience installing

items specified and three projects of similar scope.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications Company specializing in plaster installation having more than five years experience with the application of specified materials and experience on at least three projects of similar scope to project specified.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Building Code: Work of this Section to conform to all requirements of the New York City Building Code and all applicable regulations of other governmental authorities.

C. Single Source Responsibility

Obtain materials from a single source for each type of material required to assure consistency in quality of performance and appearance.

D. Plaster Mock-up Samples. 1. Provide sample patching of plaster for each of the following existing

block, wire mesh. 2. All subsequent plastering work to conform in workmanship and

appearance to that of the sample approved by the Architect.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver manufactured materials in original sealed container, with manufacturer's label intact and legible.

B. Store all cement, gypsum and lime off ground, under cover and in a dry area.

Page 205: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 3 of 8

C. Protect contiguous Work from soiling, spattering, moisture, deterioration and other harmful effects which might result from plastering.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements

1. Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is less than 50o

F,

2. Maintain required temperatures for a minimum of 24 hours prior to

application, during application and until plaster has cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Gypsum Plaster: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers, conforming to ASTM C28: 1. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co., Charlotte, NC.

a. Gypsum Neat Plaster: "Two-Way Hardwall Plaster". b. Gypsum Gauging Plaster: "Super-White Gauging Plaster". c. Gypsum Ready-Mixed Base Coat Plasters. "Gypsolite".

2. United State Gypsum Co.; Architectural Products Division, Chicago, IL. a. Gypsum Neat Plaster / Basecoat Plaster:

"Red-Top Gypsum Plaster". "Red-Top Two-Purpose Plaster". "Structo-Base", where high strength gypsum neat plaster is shown.

b. Gypsum Gauging Plaster: "Champion White Gauging Plaster" "Red-Top Gypsum Plaster" "Star White Gauging Plaster" "Red Top - Keene's Cement" "Structo - Gauging Plaster"

B. Portland Cement Plaster Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products conforming to ASTM C926 1. Base Coat Cements: ASTM C926

a. Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type I or III. 2. Finish Coat Cements

a. Portland Cement, ASTM C150, Type I, white.

C. Finishing Hydrated Lime Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products conforming to ASTM C206, Type S or Type N. 1. United States Gypsum Co.

a. "Ivory Finish Lime" - Type S

Page 206: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 4 of 8

b. "Red Top Finish Lime" - Type N

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aggregates for Base Coat Plaster; ASTM C35. Type as listed below: 1. Sand aggregate, conforming to ASTM C897

B. Water 1. Potable, free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath or accessories.

C. Bonding Agent Comply with ASTM C631; and requirements listed below: 1. Material for Bonding agent: a resinous water-emulsion that will bond new

plaster base or finish coats to CMU surfaces.

2. Material Viscosity: equal to that of ordinary paint and suitable for application by brushing or spraying.

3. Inert to oxygen and perfectly stable when water has dried out.

4. Vermin-proof, non-toxic, non-deteriorating and incapable of supporting flame.

5. Temperature range of from minus 35oF to plus 300oF without failure of bond.

6. Minimum tensile strengths varying from 50 to 600 lbs. per sq. inch, depending upon materials being bonded together, and a minimum shear strength of 175 lbs. per sq. inch when properly cured and dried samples are tested.

7. Bonding agent shall be job-approved for at least five years without any failures.

8. Wire Mesh to match adjacent mesh.

2.3 MIXES

A. Gypsum Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's directions for gypsum plaster base coat proportions which correspond to application methods and plaster bases indicated below: 1. Three-Coat Work Over Metal Lath:

a. Scratch Coat: 1 part Gypsum neat plaster with 2 parts sand.

b. Brown Coat: 1 part Gypsum neat plaster with 3 parts sand. c. Finish Coat: as in B below.

2. Two-Coat Work Over Unit Masonry: a. Base coats of 1 part Gypsum neat plaster with 2 parts sand or

Gypsum Ready-mix plaster with mill mixed perlite. b. Finish coat: as in B below.

B. Gypsum Troweled Finish Coat: Comply with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's

directions and proportion materials in parts by dry weight for finish coat as follows:

Page 207: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 5 of 8

1. Gypsum Gauging Plaster: 1 part plaster to 2 parts lime. a. Over lightweight aggregate base coats, if any, add 1/2 cu. ft.

of perlite finish or 50 lbs. of No. 1 white silica sand per 100 lbs. of plaster.

b. Where float finish is shown, add 8 parts of sand. c. Mechanically mix aggregate materials for plaster to comply with

referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer.

C. Portland Cement Base Coat Compositions Comply with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's directions for Portland cement base coat proportions that correspond to application methods and plaster bases indicated below: 1. Base coat over concrete or unit masonry: 1 part Portland cement to 3

parts sand with 10% hydrated lime added. 2. First coat must dry out and be thoroughly wet down before applying

second or finishing coat.

D. Portland Cement Finishing Coat over Concrete or Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's directions for Portland cement finishing coat proportions. 1. 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts sand with 10% hydrated lime added.

2.4 MECHANICAL MIXING

A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable reference standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES

A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive Work of this Section, preparatory Work performed by other trades, and conditions at the building. Report any defects or unsatisfactory conditions for correction to the Architect.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection 1. Provide protection for all items not to be plastered. 2. Protect the Work of other trades from soiling or spattering using cover

cloths or other approved means of protection. Should soiling or spattering occur, it can be removed by cleaning with wet sponges or brushes before

Page 208: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 6 of 8

the plaster or mortar sets, in a manner to avoid scratching, staining or other damage.

3.3 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Apply gypsum plaster materials, composition, mixes and finishes indicated to comply with ASTM C 842.

B. Apply portland cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with

ASTM C 926.

C. Allow each coat of gypsum mortar, excepting where bond plaster is required, to dry out in accordance with the manufacturer's directions prior to application of the following coat. After coat has dried out, thoroughly dampen surface prior to application of the following coat.

D. Bring first coat of plaster to a plane by screeding horizontally or other approved method. Float to an even, straight and true surface. Travel finish coat to a compact, hard, very smooth, polished surface. Soft, porous or unpolished surfaces and surfaces that show brush marks will not be accepted and such rejected white finish plastering will have to be removed down to the brown coat and properly re-plastered.

E. Do all patching required to complete the general construction Work of this Contract, leaving the Work clean and perfect in every particular at completion of the building.

F. Sand smooth-troweled finishes lightly to remove travel marks and arises.

3.4 PATCHING AND PROTECTING

A. Repair, point up and patch plaster surfaces after work of other trades is in place and at such times as directed by the Architect.

B. Point up around fixtures, outlet boxes, switches, plates, fittings, piping, conduit, frames and other items abutting or extending through the plaster.

C. Just before painting is started, thoroughly examine all plaster surfaces. Cut out and repair all imperfect portions, cracks and other defects and leave all plaster in a sound, unblemished, clean and satisfactory condition.

D. Protect finished plaster surfaces against damages, soiling and defacement.

E. Protect plaster work against freezing and premature drying.

Page 209: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 7 of 8

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other Work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering. When plastering is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner suitable to the Architect which ensures plaster work being without damage or deterioration at time of approval.

END OF SECTION

Page 210: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 10 - Plaster Repair

Page 8 of 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 211: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing Page 1 of 6

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 09 22 16

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

B. Suspension systems for interior gypsum soffits.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 17 00 - Support System for Suspended Ceilings

B. Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board: Interior wall sheathing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.

Page 212: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing Page 2 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for

metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A653, G60, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average

recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312-inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one (1) of the following: 1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1)

of the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track 2) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series. 3) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the

following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

Page 213: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing Page 3 of 6

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312-inch.

G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick,

galvanized steel.

H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312-inch. 2. Depth: 7/8-inch.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4-inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with

minimum bare-steel thickness of 0.0312-inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Track Fasteners: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five (5) times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one (1) of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

non-perforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow

fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8-inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

Page 214: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing Page 4 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Soffit Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor

plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840

that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

Page 215: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing Page 5 of 6

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural

supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two (2) studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a

minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

D. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

F. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

G. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

Page 216: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing Page 6 of 6

H. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches

o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring

members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

I. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8-inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION

Page 217: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 1 of 12

GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09 29 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior gypsum board.

B. Sound Attenuating Blankets

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content,

documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

Page 218: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 2 of 12

3. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to

project for each regionally manufactured material. b. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and point of

extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Indicate distance to project and fraction by weight of each regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted.

4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch long length for each trim

accessory indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and

wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become

part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

Page 219: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 3 of 12

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not

limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,

fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content.

B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of project site.

C. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of project site.

Page 220: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 4 of 12

D. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. G-P Gypsum. 2. Lafarge North America Inc. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396. 1. Thickness: 5/8-inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396. 1. Thickness: 5/8-inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1629, Level 1 - Use only in corridors 1. Core: 5/8-inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D3274.

E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8-inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D3274.

F. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: ASTM C1396; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Thickness: One (1) inch.

2. Long Edges: Double bevel. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.

Page 221: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 5 of 12

1. Material: [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet] [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc] [Plastic] [Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet].

2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint

compound. e. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot

and removable strip covering slot opening.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,

fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim

accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose

compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

Page 222: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 6 of 12

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel

members from 0.033- to 0.112-inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size

recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. Thickness as indicated on the Drawings. Density: 2.5 lbs/cubic foot minimum. Thermafiber, Corp.; Roxul, Inc. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements

of assembly. 2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-

half of preconsumer recycled content.

E. Sound Attenuation Blankets used for tight wall cavities: 1 inch or 2 inch Quilted SoundproofingTM Curtains made by Acoustical Surfaces, Inc. – See locations noted in Part 3 of this Section.

F. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90. 1. Manufacturers:

a. U.S. Gypsum b. Tremco, Inc. c. Miracle Adhesives

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Page 223: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 7 of 12

3. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one (1) framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or

smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than eight (8) sq ft in area.

Page 224: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 8 of 12

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one (1) side. 1. If wall cavity areas are insufficient to provide blanket noted above, provide 1

inch or 2 inch Quilted Curtains between studs overlapping thicker materials. a. Provide quilted curtains behind electrical junction boxes in single stud

sound attenuated walls.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Typical Wallboard Type: Type X as indicated on Drawings. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: Ceiling surfaces in toilet areas.

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one (1) framing member in

alternate courses of panels. b. At high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or

required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

Page 225: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 9 of 12

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying

base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one (1) framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one (1) stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one (1) furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: [Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws] [Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners].

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 1. Where fire and/or sound control are required, install an approved sealant

behind the control joint.

C. Maximum Spacing of Control Joints: 1. Interior Partitions:

a. Maximum Single Dimension: 30 feet in either direction.

D. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

Page 226: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 10 of 12

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners . 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Concealed areas only. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 5: Ceilings and partitions.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 90 00.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C754 other than stud-spacing requirements.

B. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing. 1. Reinforcing: Where handrails or other wall mounted devices directly attach

to gypsum board shaft wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.033-inch minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated),

Page 227: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 11 of 12

accurately positioned and secured behind at least one (1) layer of face panel.

C. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.

D. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

E. Firestop Tracks: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

F. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.

G. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly.

H. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8-inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not

limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,

fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

Page 228: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Page 12 of 12

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 229: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 1 of 10

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 09 51 23

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Acoustical tiles for ceilings and their indirect suspension grid system.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 17 00 - Direct Support System for Suspended Ceilings

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light-Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

E. Direct Suspension System: Directly fastened to floor or roof construction above, installed as part of the Work of Section 05 17 00.

F. Indirect Suspension System: Installed as part of the Work of this Section, as furnished by ceiling system manufacturer to be attached to direct suspension system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

Page 230: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 2 of 10

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Indirect suspension system members 2. Direct suspended ceiling support system per Section 05 17 00. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size samples of each type, color, pattern, and

texture. 2. Suspension System Members: 12-inch long sample of each type 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 12-inch long samples of each type and

color.

F. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

G. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

H. Field quality-control test reports.

I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical tile ceiling.

J. Research/Evaluation Reports: For acoustical tile ceiling and components.

K. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

B. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type through one (1) source from a

single manufacturer. 2. Indirect suspension System: Obtain each type through one (1) source from

a single manufacturer.

Page 231: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 3 of 10

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84: a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed

at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48

hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical tiles and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

Page 232: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 4 of 10

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to five (5) percent of quantity

installed. 2. Indirect Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid

and exposed component equal to five (5) percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 75 percent

B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in

which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E795.

C. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by

referencing pattern designations in ASTM E1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

D. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

Page 233: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 5 of 10

2. BPB USA. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong Ultima, Beveled Tegular with “HumiGuard Plus”

C. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type III, mineral base with painted finish 2. Pattern: G (smooth).

D. Color: White

E. LR: Not less than 0.85.

F. NRC: Not less than 0.75.

G. CAC: Not less than 35.

H. AC: Not less than 170.

I. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Tegular.

J. Thickness: 15/16 inch.

K. Modular Size: 24 by 72 inches.

L. Antimicrobial Treatment: Fungicide based.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS – INDIRECT HUNG, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C635.

C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

Page 234: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 6 of 10

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Prelude or a comparable product by one (1) of the following: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

C. Indirect-Hung Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A653, G30 coating designation. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Main runners: Connect to direct suspension system (refer to Specification

Section 05 17 00). 3. Access: Where access is indicated, provide special cross runners or split

splines to allow for removal of acoustical units in indicated access areas. Identify access tile with manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers for each access unit.

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB USA. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Fry Reglet Corporation. 5. Gordon, Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following: 1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer

and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B221 for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.

2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

3. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; organic coating: as specified below). Apply baked

Page 235: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 7 of 10

enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, enamel primer/topcoat system with

a minimum dry film thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mils.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.

C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical tile ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

Page 236: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 8 of 10

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine the building before beginning Work to determine that it is properly enclosed and the structure is in proper condition to receive acoustical materials and suspension system. Area shall be broom cleaned and uninterrupted for free movement of rolling scaffold. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions prevail.

B. Verify that direct suspension system has been installed properly, that main runners are spaced evenly and have been leveled to a tolerance of 1/8" in 12' measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners so that indirect suspension system installation may proceed accurately.

C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Cut as required for installation of electric fixtures, air diffusers, grilles, sprinkler heads, security devices, access doors, etc., provided under other contracts. Verify sizes and locations with other trades.

C. On completion, the ceilings shall present a uniform horizontal plane surface, unless otherwise indicated, free from blemishes and imperfections. Exposed grid cross runners shall fit tightly against adjacent main runners, with no visible gaps.

D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on

back of vertical leg before installing moldings. 2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not

more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one (1) another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install panels in coordination with suspension system with suspension members concealed by support of tile units.

G. Neatly scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders, interruptions, and penetrations. The cut edges of reveal tegular lay-in mineral fiber panels shall be

Page 237: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 9 of 10

field cut to match profile of factory edges, in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Paint the cut edges to match factory finish where exposed to view, using paint supplied by panel manufacturer.

H. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material. 1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit

at borders and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers

between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

B. Remove and replace Work that is damaged or soiled by other trades.

END OF SECTION

Page 238: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 51 23 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings

Page 10 of 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 239: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories Page 1 of 6

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09 65 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Resilient base.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 36 00 - Concrete Floor Finish System

B. Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on the Schedule for Finishes and the Drawings.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq cm.

Page 240: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories Page 2 of 6

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 degree F or more than 90 degree F.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degree For more than 95 degree F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degree F or more than 95 degree F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 2 linear feet for every, of each type, color, pattern,

and size of resilient product installed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail within the warranty period.

B. Limited Warranty Period: 1. One (1) year from date of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide product of equal or better quality and performance as approved by the Architect by one (1) of the following:

Page 241: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories Page 3 of 6

1. Johnsonite: Traditional Wall Base 2. Roppe Corporation, USA: 700 Series.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125-inch.

D. Height: Six (6) inches.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: Satin.

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

Page 242: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories Page 4 of 6

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they

will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

C. Clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form

without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

Page 243: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories Page 5 of 6

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Page 244: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories Page 6 of 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 245: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

Page 1 of 6

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09 65 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Vinyl composition floor tile.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content,

documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient tile flooring, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore standard.

D. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less

than nine (9) inches long, of each color required.

E. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

Page 246: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

Page 2 of 6

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one (1) box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of

each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this project who are trained or

certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq ft for each type, color, and pattern locations directed by Architect.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 degrees F or more than 90 degrees F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.

Page 247: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

Page 3 of 6

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 degrees F or more than 75 degrees F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following: 1. AB; American Biltrite. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Congoleum Corporation. 4. Mannington Mills, Inc.

Page 248: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

Page 4 of 6

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F1066, Class 1, solid-color

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125-inch.

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L or less.

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other

requirements specified in other sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

Page 249: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

Page 5 of 6

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and

hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible

with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile and underlayment manufacturers. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F1869.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of three (3) lbs of water/1000 sq ft in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and provide self leveling underlayment using Ardex K16, from ARDEX Americas 400 Ardex Park Drive, Aliquippa, Pennsylvania 15001. Remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 72 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and

installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

Page 250: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring

Page 6 of 6

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one (1) direction or in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Provide vinyl thresholds and reducers at doorways, under center of door. Color to be complimentary with tile, approved by architect.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply three (3) coat(s).

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Page 251: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 1 of 10

PAINTS AND COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board. 6. Plaster.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: Shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this section.

B. Division 08 sections for factory priming doors with primers specified in this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed

statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings,

documentation indicating that they meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard

Page 252: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 2 of 10

Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit samples on rigid backing, eight (8) inches square. 2. Step coats on samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each sample. 4. Label each sample for location and application area.

F. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI

Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one (1) surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degree F.

Page 253: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 3 of 10

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than five (5) degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional five (5) percent, but not less than one (1)

gallon of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Benjamin Moore & Co, Regal Paint or comparable product by one (1) of the following: 1. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 3. Tnemec Company, Inc.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with

one (1) another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants

Page 254: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 4 of 10

added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non-flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150

g/L.

C. Colors: As indicated in the finish schedule.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.

B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.

C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.

2.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.5.

B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.

C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.

D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.5.

Page 255: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 5 of 10

E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.

F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degree). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.

G. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.

H. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #144 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.

I. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.

J. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of

substrates and conditions.

Page 256: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 6 of 10

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades

involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible

primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar

exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

Page 257: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 7 of 10

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Suppression, and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas

insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. List below contains items that are usually field painted. Revise list to suit project.

b. Equipment, including panelboards. c. Uninsulated metal piping. d. Uninsulated plastic piping. e. Pipe hangers and supports. f. Metal conduit. g. Junction boxes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas

insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. i. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

4. Paint exposed, utility lines, piping and conduits in code required colors.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample

paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying-paint materials from project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces

Page 258: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 8 of 10

if, on repainting with complying materials, the two (2) paints are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates: 1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).

2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex; interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #54. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S.

a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based). b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex; semi-gloss finish

(Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

B. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim and architectural woodwork. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood[, MPI #39]. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,

matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss

(Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

Page 259: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 9 of 10

C. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss

Level 1), MPI #143 at ceilings d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 2), MPI #144 at wall surfaces

END OF SECTION

Page 260: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings Page 10 of 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 261: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 1 of 8

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES SECTION 10 11 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glass marker boards.

B. Tack board assemblies.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units. 2. Include electrical characteristics for motorized units.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.

Coordinate and represent all conditions and adjacent devices on walls that receive new units.

2. Show locations of panel joints. Show locations of field-assembled joints for factory-fabricated units too large to ship in one (1) piece.

3. Include sections of typical trim members.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows: 1. Samples of facings for each visual display panel type, indicating color and

texture.

Page 262: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 2 of 8

2. Actual factory-finish color samples, applied to substrate. 3. Include accessory samples to verify color selected.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display unit indicated. 1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with facing, core,

and backing indicated for final Work. Include one (1) panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Accessories: Full-size sample of each type of accessory.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of tackboards.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. Include

accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

Page 263: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 3 of 8

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one (1) piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one (1) piece, provide two (2) or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved shop drawings.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field measurements before fabrication. 1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before

fabrication might delay the Work.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 GLASS MARKERBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Clarus Glassboards LLC. 8715 Harmon Road, Fort Worth, TX 76177 2. Ph: 888.813.7414.

Page 264: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 4 of 8

B. Glass Markerboards: ¼” tempered glass markerboard with metal backer panel. Glazing has smooth polished edge and eased corners; color coated on back surface of glazing.

C. Mounting: Adhesive- M65 Permawhite Polythane Contruction Glue and 3M VHB Structural Glazing Tape.

D. Color and Surface: Glossy, color as selected by architect from manufacturer’s full color range.

E. Marker Tray: Curve - anodized aluminum, magnetic.

F. Size: varies – as dimensioned on the drawings.

2.4 TACKBOARD PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product specified or a product of another manufacturer of equal or better quality and performance as approved by the Architect: 1. Homasote Company; 932 Lower Ferry Road, West Trenton, NJ 08628. Tel: (800)

257-9491. Tel: (609) 883-3300. Fax: (609) 883-3497. Email: [email protected]. Website: www.homasote.com. Source Limitations: Provide all finished wall panels from a single manufacturer.

B. Provide all finished wall panels from a single manufacturer.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. PINnacle N.C.F.R., Class A Fire-tested board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Density: 34-40 pcf (545-641 kg/cu. m) tested in accordance with ASTM C

209. 3. Tensile Strength: When tested in accordance with ASTM C 209:

a. Parallel: 400-700 psi (2,758-4,826 kPa). b. Transverse: 600-950 psi (4,130-6,555 kPa).

4. Hardness (Janka Ball): 275 lbs (124 kg) tested in accordance with ASTM D 1037.

5. Water Absorption by Volume: When tested in accordance with ASTM C 209: a. 2 hour immersion: 7 percent maximum.

6. Expansion: 50 to 90 percent relative humidity, 0..30 percent in accordance with ASTM C 209.

7. Noise reduction coefficient (NRC): 0.20 8. Flame Spread: 25, smoke developed: 20, fuel contributed 0; tested in

accordance with ASTM E 84; Class I or A.

Page 265: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 5 of 8

B. Edge detail: All panel edges are square.

C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, extruded ½” x 1” continuous angle frame, mitered and anchored under board

D. Adhesives for Field Application: APA AFG-01 approved.

E. Wall Panel Fasteners: 1. Annular threaded nails: Length as required to penetrate into wall studs 3/4

inch (19 mm) minimum.

F. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Section 09 90 00 and recommended in writing by manufacturer for intended substrate.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.

C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.

Page 266: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 6 of 8

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.

D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive units and as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.

E. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Glass Boards 1. Walls must be clean of all dust particles. 2. Fasten L channel to studs and metal backing on bottom and top of

application. 3. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured

length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as indicated on approved shop drawings

4. Apply Structural Glazing Tape on the edges and select locations behind glass.

5. Use glue applied to back of glass thoroughly. Glue must not be applied too close to the edge as to not come out from behind the glass as it cures.

6. Glue takes approximately 24 hours to cure. Braces recommended to stabilize product during curing process.

C. Tack Board Assemblies: 1. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for cutting and installation of PINnacle

Page 267: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 7 of 8

2. Adhere to existing and gypsum wall surfaces, using approved APA subfloor adhesive meeting APA-AFG-01 specifications, apply a 3/8 inch bead of adhesive. Holding back 3/4 inch from panel edges at 16” centers.

3. Provide butt joints between panels, allow 1/16 inch max space at panel joints. Provide 1/8” inch space along walls and partitions to perimeter angel frame.

4. Use proper length ring shank nails to penetrate wall stud 3/4 inch minimum 5. If applying PINnacle panels to adhesive and framing, apply hand pressure

where adhesive is located to insure positive contact; nail panels at maximum 24” centers along edges and 24” centers along all intermediate framing. Nails should be of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4”into framing. Position nails 1 1/4” from edge panels.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one (1) removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.

END OF SECTION

Page 268: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 11 00 - Visual Display Surfaces

Page 8 of 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENITONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 269: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Page 1 of 6

SIGNAGE SECTION 10 14 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior Sign Plaques.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work: Labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Division 26 sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

Page 270: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Page 2 of 6

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of each sign, any supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. Provide elevations of sign groupings to be mounted.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors indicated on the drawings:

E. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Plaque: Full sign sample, approximately, six (6) inches square. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size samples shall show each type of each

type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element). Sample to demonstrate fabricator understands the manufacturing process and quality noted in the contract.

3. Acrylic Sheet 4. Polycarbonate Sheet

F. Sign Schedule: Use same name and number designations indicated on Drawings.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this section.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

Page 271: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Page 3 of 6

C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one (1) source from a single manufacturer.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify clearances by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cast Solid Colored Acrylic: Of thickness indicated, monolithic thermally formed and bonded tactile plaque constructed utilizing a high-pressure thermoforming process. The sign body, face, raised text and Braille are compression molded to form a single dimensional component creating a sign surface, body, and graphic elements which exhibit abrasion, crack and graffiti resistant surfaces.

2.2 PLAQUES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Colorcyrl - Fully integral colored acrylic sign by Identity Group – Alchemy Dimensional Graphics, 610 Meadowlands Dr., Hillsborough, NC 27278, (919) 673-0012 or approved equal. EPICS series aluminum and polycarbonate sign by

Page 272: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Page 4 of 6

Infonorm, 4820 Joslyn Road, Lake Orion, MI 48359, (248) 276-9027, or approved equal.

B. Plaque Schedule: 1. Plaque Type 2. Plaque Size 3. Character Size 4. Character Finish/Color 5. Text/Message 6. Location 7. Room 8. Quantity

C. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32-inch.

D. Subsurface Copy: Apply minimum 4-mil- thick vinyl copy to back face of clear acrylic sheet forming panel face to produce precisely formed opaque image. Image shall be free of rough edges.

E. Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. 2. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

Page 273: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Page 5 of 6

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free

of distortion and other defects in appearance; using manufacturer’s recommended standard mounting system

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within three (3) inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use

this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces.

Page 274: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Page 6 of 6

4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 1. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by

manufacturer 2. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer 3. Replace damaged products prior to completion.

END OF SECTION

Page 275: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 1 of 8

METAL LOCKERS SECTION 10 51 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section. Section Includes:

1. Standard steel lockers.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood ground and furring for anchoring

lockers.

C. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM A 1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved

Formability.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:

Include plans, elevations, sections, anchoring, installation details and attachments to other work.

Show locker trim and accessories, including: doors, handles, locks, ventilation, options, trim, and finish

Page 276: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 2 of 8

Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available.

D. Samples for Verification: For the selected samples, in manufacturer's standard size

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene pre-installation meeting before start of

installation of lockers. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this

section, including Contractor, Architect, installer, and manufacturer's

representative. Review installation, adjusting, cleaning, protection, and

coordination with other work.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five (5) units: a. Locks. b. Identification plates. c. Hooks.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers

and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent

damage.

Page 277: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 3 of 8

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of wood bases for metal lockers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: d. Structural failures. e. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Lyon Workspace Products, PO Box 671, Aurora, Illinois 60507.

Toll Free (800) 323-0082.

Phone (630) 892-8941.

Web Site www.lyonworkspace.com.

2.2 STANDARD STEEL LOCKERS

A. Model: Standard Quiet Lockers in styles located on contract drawings.

B. Style: Single tier

1. Locker Size: 15” inches wide by 24” inches deep by 66” inches high per

opening

2. Locker Configuration: Single row

Page 278: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 4 of 8

3. Provide Galvanized Coat Rod

C. Style: Double tier

1. Locker Size: 18” inches wide by 24” inches deep by 66” inches high per

opening

2. Locker Configuration: Double row

D. Construction: Fully assembled.

E. Material:

1. Steel: ASTM A 1008, Class I, mild-annealed, cold-rolled steel, free from

surface imperfections

2. Bolts: Zinc plated or other comparable rust-retardant treatment.

F. Body:

1. 24-gauge steel.

2. Flanged to give double thickness of metal at back vertical corners.

G. Door Frame:

1. 16-gauge formed-steel channels.

2. Vertical Members: Additional flange to form continuous door strike.

3. Corners: Lapped and welded into rigid assembly.

4. Bottom Cross Members: Tang at each end that fits through slot in rear

flange of upright frame member to prevent twisting out of alignment.

5. Top and Bottom Cross Members: Provide support for front edge of locker

top and bottom.

H. Doors:

1. 1-piece, [16-gauge] steel.

2. Locker Doors: Both vertical edges formed into channel-shaped formation.

Top and bottom flanged at 90-degree angle.

J. Ventilation:

1. Double-Tier Lockers:

a. Over 9 Inches Wide: Six 6-inch louvers top and bottom.

2. Double-Tier Lockers: [Mini louvers].

K. Hinges:

1. Height: Minimum of 2 inches.

2. Type: 0.050-inch thick steel, 5-knuckle, full-loop hinge forming double

thickness on each leaf.

Page 279: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 5 of 8

3. Attachment: Set hinges in slot in door and frame and projection welded to

frame and securely attached to door.

4. Hinge Pin: Spun over at ends to resist removal.

5. Double Tiers: 2 hinges.

6. Mounting: Right-hand side of door.

L. Multi-Point Locking Device:

1. Double Tier Locking Device: Engage frame at 2 points.

2. Channel-Shaped Locking Device:

a. Full-length reinforcing ribs.

b. Quiet design using nylon-guide inserts to reduce metal-to-metal contact.

3. Lock Bar: Enclosed on 3 sides and operate within channel formation of

door.

4. Locking Device: Prelocking so mechanism can be locked in open position;

door locking automatically when closed.

5. Door Jambs:

a. Double Tier Lockers: 2 jambs welded to side of door frames to engage

locking device.

b. Safety Reverse Nose for Each Jamb: Eliminate hazard of sharp-pointed

edges protruding into locker.

c. Easily replaceable soft rubber bumper for each jamb.

6. Single-point latch.

M. Handles:

1. Recessed Handles:

a. ADA compliant, single lift.

N. Coat Hooks:

1. Double & single tier lockers.

2. 1 double-prong ceiling hook at double tier lockers only and 3 single-prong

wall hooks at both types.

3. Steel rod stock with ball points for snag-free use.

4. Attachment: 2 bolts.

5. Finish: Zinc-plated or comparable rust-retardant treatment.

6. Mounting: Right-hand side of door.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Number Plates:

1. Aluminum.

2. Size: 2-3/4 inches wide by 1 inch high.

Page 280: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 6 of 8

3. Numbers: Clearly etched numbers a minimum of 3/8 inch high.

4. Attachment: Attach in prepunched holes near top of doors.

B. Locks: Padlock

C. Tops: Flat

D. Bottoms: Painted steel, 16 gauge

E. Floor Anchoring: Anchor lockers to floor in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

F. Closures and Fillers

1. Top closures, closure strips, front expansion fillers, and corner fillers.

2. Fill spaces between 2 lockers or between lockers and walls as required for

proper fit.

G. End Panels:

1. End Cover Panels: 14-gauge steel, construction bolt heads exposed at

perimeter.

2. End Finishing Panels: 16-gauge steel, no bolt heads exposed.

H. Base:

1. Front & End Base Covers for Lockers and 6” Legs.

2.5 FINISH

A. General: Factory apply finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Standard Finish: Exposed steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given bonding

and rust- inhibitive phosphate treatment, and electrostatically sprayed with

powder coat. Baked-on finish.

C. Antimicrobial Finish: Apply antimicrobial finish. D. Color: to be determined by

architect.

1. Exterior Color: to be determined.

2. Interior Color: [Match exterior color]

3. Single-Point Latching System:

a. Single, double, triple, and multiple-tier lockers.

b. 4-1/8 inches wide by 6-1/16 inches high by 1-1/4 inches deep.

c. Flush-front appearance.

Page 281: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 7 of 8

d. Operates with no moving parts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lockers. Notify Architect if areas are not acceptable.

Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lockers and cabinets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at

locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install lockers and cabinets plumb, level, square, rigid, with flush installation.

C. Use manufacturer's supplied hardware.

D. Anchoring: Anchor lockers and cabinets to floors in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

E. Joints: Provide flush hairline joints against adjacent surfaces.

F. Number Plates: Attach number plates to face of doors level with 2 aluminum

rivets. Attach in sequence as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and as approved by Architect.

H. Remove and replace defective or damaged components that cannot be

successfully repaired as determined by Architect.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors, locks, and operating hardware to function properly and for smooth

operation without binding.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's

Page 282: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers

Page 8 of 8

instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not

permit use during construction.

B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to

factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended

or furnished by locker manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Page 283: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades Page 1 of 6

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES SECTION 12 24 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manually operated double roller shade assemblies at exterior windows.

B. Manually operated single roller shade assembly at room entrance door lites.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade. 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square of each type. Mark

inside face of material if applicable. 2. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.

E. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

Page 284: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades Page 2 of 6

C. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale

vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.

D. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi

ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use.

Page 285: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades Page 3 of 6

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer’s standard non-

depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product specified or a product of another manufacturer of equal or better quality and performance as approved by the Architect: 1. MechoShade Systems, Inc; Product: Mecho /5 DoubleShade

42-03 35th Street

Long Island City, NY 11101

Tel: (718) 729-2020

Website: www.mechoshade.com

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH DOUBLE ROLLERS

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10-lbs or for shades as

recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.

Page 286: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades Page 4 of 6

B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

D. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

E. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of

roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and

shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than four (4) inches. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's

full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Thermoveil 3000 Series Privacy Weave Collection; Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. Room side of double roller assembly 1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Type: Woven polyester and PVC-coated polyester. 3. Weave: Diamond Twill Pattern. 4. Thickness: 32 mil. 5. Weight: 16.8 oz/sq yd. 6. Roll Width: Stocked 72 inches and 96-inches. 7. Openness Factor: one (1) to two (2) percent. 8. Room side of double roller assembly

Page 287: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades Page 5 of 6

9. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Room darkening (PVC Free) Shadecloth with opaque acrylic backing: MechoShade Systems, Inc., "Equinox 0100 series", .008 inches thick (.19 mm) blackout material and weighing .94 lbs. per square yard, comprising of 53% fiberglass, 45% acrylic, 2% poly finish 1. Use:

a. Window side of double roller assembly located at existing windows b. Shade cloth at single shade assemblies on the room entrance door lites

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 degrees F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension

of opening in which shade is installed less ¼-inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8-inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less ¼-inch, plus or minus 1/8-inch.

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or

greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one (1) partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

Page 288: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades Page 6 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Minimize gaps between shades and adjacent surfaces.

C. Install shades at all exterior windows in the contract work area and interior borrowed lights of the Huddle Room.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Page 289: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 12 – General Provisions for HVAC Work Page 1 of 2

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION 23 05 12

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED

A. Work Included: 1. The work includes providing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services

and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified, including, but not limited to the following: a. Sheet metal ductwork and accessories such as dampers, etc. b. Registers, grilles and diffusers. c. Cleaning of existing ductwork. d. Temperature Control: A complete system of temperature control shall be

installed in connection with the HVAC systems, including all thermostats, control valves, damper motors and dampers for the outdoor air intakes and fan discharges. All control wiring for automatic temperature controls, including interlocking wiring for fans, chillers, pumps, etc. by this Contractor.

e. Painting and pipe, duct and equipment identification for all work by this Contractor is previously specified under "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".

f. Test and balancing. g. All demolition work associated with HVAC systems.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with quality established in Section 01 31 46 "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and hereinafter specified. All work performed shall comply with local codes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings covering the following items: 1. Air diffusers, registers and grilles. 2. Schedule of ductwork, joints, gauges, supports, flexible connections, fire dampers,

access doors, etc. 3. Sheet metal fabrication drawings. 4. Schedule of insulation types and samples of each type.

Page 290: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 12 – General Provisions for HVAC Work Page 2 of 2

B. All shop drawings being submitted that include electrical work shall be submitted with all internal and external wiring diagrams.

C. The previously listed items are major equipment and do not limit this Division's responsibility to submit shop drawings for all equipment and accessories which are to be provided under this Division of the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LIST OF MANUFACTURERS

A. The manufacturer's name appearing first on this list is the manufacturer the project design was based upon. However, the additional manufacturers listed herein are also acceptable with the provision that they meet the requirements of these Specifications, ratings, and/or space allocations listed in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings. 1. Diffusers, Registers & Grilles

a. Titus b. Price c. Anemostat d. Acutherm e. Nailor

2. Insulation and Acoustic Lining a. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. b. CSG Snap-on c. Johns Manville d. or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 23 05 12

Page 291: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 1 of 9

DUCT CLEANING SECTION 23 05 67

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to clean all existing ductwork to remain and be reused.

B. Cleaning of ductwork must be performed prior to leak testing ductwork.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Membership: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be a certified member of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA), or shall maintain membership in a nationally recognized non-profit industry organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

B. Certification: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall have a minimum of one (1) Air System Cleaning Specialist (ASCS) certified by NADCA on a full time basis, or shall have staff certified by a nationally recognized certification program and organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

C. Supervisor Qualifications: A person certified as an ASCS by NADCA, or maintaining an equivalent certification by a nationally recognized program and organization, shall be responsible for the total work herein specified.

D. Experience: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall submit records of experience in the field of HVAC system cleaning as requested by the owner. Bids shall only be considered from firms which are regularly engaged in HVAC system maintenance with an emphasis on HVAC system cleaning and decontamination.

E. Equipment, Materials and Labor: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall possess and furnish all necessary equipment, materials and labor to adequately perform the specified services. 1. The contractor shall assure that its employees have received safety equipment

training, medical surveillance programs, individual health protection measures, and manufacturer's product and material safety data sheets (MSDS) as required for the work by the U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and as

Page 292: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 2 of 9

described by this specification. For work performed in countries outside of the U.S.A., contractors should comply with applicable national safety codes and standards.

2. The contractor shall maintain a copy of all current MSDS documentation and safety certifications at the site at all times, as well as comply with all other site documentation requirements of applicable OSHA programs and this specification

3. Contractor shall submit to the owner all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemical products proposed to be used in the cleaning process.

F. Licensing: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall provide proof of maintaining the proper license(s), if any, as required to do work in this state. Contractor shall comply with all Federal, state and local rules, regulations, and licensing requirements.

1.04 STANDARDS

A. NADCA Standards: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall perform the services specified here in accordance with the current published standards of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA). 1. All terms in this specification shall have their meaning defined as stated in the

NADCA Standards. 2. NADCA Standards must be followed with no modifications or deviations being

allowed.

1.05 DOCUMENTS

A. Mechanical Drawings: The mechanical contractor shall provide the HVAC system cleaning contractor with one copy of the following documents: 1. Project drawings and specifications 2. Approved construction revisions pertaining to the HVAC system 3. Any existing indoor air quality (IAQ) assessments or environmental reports

prepared for the facility.

1.06 PRE-QUALIFIED CLEANING CONTRACTORS

A. Pre-qualified acceptable firms include the following: 1. G&G Duct Cleaning, (718) 786-6401. 2. Duct Dusters, (914) 776-5700. 3. Scientific Environmental Services, Co. (718) 389-3260. 4. Fire Proofing Corp. of America, (212) 254-6340.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Work and submit shop drawings.

B. Submit list of references for at least five (5) projects of size similar for which the firm has provided duct cleaning services successfully. Lists shall include: 1. Name and address of the project. 2. A description of the project and the services provided.

Page 293: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 3 of 9

3. Name and telephone number of references.

C. Submit a detailed description of how the duct cleaning will be carried out. The description should be specific to this project, identifying and describing equipment and procedures to be used.

D. Catalog cuts for equipment to be used shall be submitted.

E. Fiber-optic borescope pictures of the pre-cleaned conditions as required in paragraph 3.3. Do not start cleaning until these pictures have been submitted and approved.

F. Fiber-optic borescope pictures of the post-cleaned conditions.

G. Provide a detailed schedule for when cleaning work which will be carried out. Coordinate with other work under this contract.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Refer to Section - Special Requirements for Work.

1.09 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section - Special Requirements for Work.

PART 2 - HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

2.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Scope: This section defines the minimum requirements necessary to render HVAC components clean, and to verify the cleanliness through inspection and/or testing in accordance with items specified herein and applicable NADCA Standards.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system in strict accordance with these specifications.

The HVAC system includes any interior surface of the facility's air distribution system for conditioned spaces and/or occupied zones. This includes the entire heating, air conditioning and ventilation system from the points where the air enters the system to the points where the air is discharged from the system. The return air grilles, return air ducts (except ceiling plenums and mechanical room) to the air handling unit (AHU), the interior surfaces of the AHU, mixing box, coil compartment, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, supply air ducts, fans, fan housing, fan blades, air wash systems, spray eliminators, turning vanes, filters, filter housings, reheat coils, and supply diffusers are all considered part of the HVAC system and is shown on mechanical drawings to remain.

Page 294: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 4 of 9

2.02 HVAC SYSTEM INSPECTIONS AND SITE PREPARATIONS

A. HVAC System Evaluation: Prior to the commencement of any cleaning work, the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall perform a visual inspection of the HVAC system to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required to satisfactorily complete this project. 1. Damaged system components found during the inspection shall be documented

and brought to the attention of the owner.

B. Site Evaluation and Preparations: Contractor shall conduct a site evaluation, and establish a specific, coordinated plan which details how each area of the building will be protected during the various phases of the project.

2.03 GENERAL HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING REQUIREMENTS

A. Containment: Debris removed during cleaning shall be collected and precautions must be taken to ensure that Debris is not otherwise dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.

B. Particulate Collection: Where the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting inside the building, HEPA filtration with 99.97% collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or greater) particles shall be used. When the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting outside the building, Mechanical Cleaning operations shall be undertaken only with Particulate Collection Equipment in place, including adequate filtration to contain Debris removed from the HVAC system. When the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting outside the building, precautions shall be taken to locate the equipment down wind and away from all air intakes and other points of entry into the building.

C. Controlling Odors: All reasonable measures shall be taken to control offensive odors and/or mist vapors during the cleaning process.

D. Component Cleaning: Cleaning methods shall be employed such that all HVAC system components must be Visibly Clean as defined in applicable standards (see NADCA Standards). Upon completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning operations.

E. Air-Volume Control Devices: Dampers and any air-directional mechanical devices inside the HVAC system must have their position marked prior to cleaning and, upon completion, must be restored to their marked position.

F. Service Openings: The contractor shall utilize service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry, and inspection. 1. Contractor shall utilize the existing service openings already installed in the HVAC

system where possible. 2. Other openings shall be created where needed and they must be created so they

can be sealed in accordance with industry codes and standards.

Page 295: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 5 of 9

3. Closures must not significantly hinder, restrict, or alter the air-flow within the system.

4. Closures must be properly insulated to prevent heat loss/gain or condensation on surfaces within the system.

5. Openings must not compromise the structural integrity of the system. 6. Construction techniques used in the creation of openings should conform to

requirements of applicable building and fire codes, and applicable NFPA, SMACNA and NADCA Standards.

7. Cutting service openings into flexible duct is not permitted. Flexible duct shall be disconnected at the ends as needed for proper cleaning and inspection.

8. Rigid fiber glass ductboard duct systems shall be resealed in accordance with NAIMA recommended practices. Only closure techniques which comply with UL Standard 181 or UL Standard 181 a are suitable for fiber glass duct system closures.

9. All service openings capable of being re-opened for future inspection or remediation shall be clearly marked and shall have their location reported to the owner in project report documents.

G. Ceiling sections (tile): The contractor may remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access to HVAC systems during the cleaning process.

H. Shaft walls (CHV): The Contractor may create openings to gain access to HVAC risers during the cleaning process.

I. Duct Systems: Contractor shall: 1. Create service openings in the system as necessary in order to accommodate

cleaning of otherwise inaccessible areas. 2. Mechanically clean all duct systems to remove all visible contaminants, such that

the systems are capable of passing Cleaning Verification Testings (see NADCA Standards).

2.04 HEALTH AND SAFETY

A. Safety Standards: Cleaning contractors shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local requirements for protecting the safety of the contractors' employees, building occupants, and the environment. In particular, all applicable standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) shall be followed when working in accordance with this specification.

B. Occupant Safety: No processes or materials shall be employed in such a manner that they will introduce additional hazards into occupied spaces.

C. Disposal of Debris. All Debris removed from the HVAC System shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal, state and local requirements.

Page 296: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 6 of 9

2.05 MECHANICAL CLEANING METHODOLOGY

A. Source Removal Cleaning Methods: the HVAC system shall be cleaned using Source Removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the HVAC system and safely remove contaminants from the facility. It is the contractor's responsibility to select Source Removal methods which will render the HVAC system Visibly Clean and capable of passing cleaning verification methods (See applicable NADCA Standards) and other specified tests, in accordance with all general requirements. No cleaning method, or combination of methods, shall be used which could potentially damage components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system. 1. All methods used shall incorporate the use of vacuum collection devices that are

operated continuously during cleaning. A vacuum device shall be connected to the downstream end of the section being cleaned through a predetermined opening. The vacuum collection device must be of sufficient power to render all areas being cleaned under negative pressure, such that containment of debris and the protection of the indoor environment is assured.

2. All vacuum devices exhausting air inside the building shall be equipped with HEPA filters (minimum efficiency), including hand-held vacuums and wet vacuums.

3. All vacuum devices exhausting air outside the facility shall be equipped with Particulate Collection including adequate filtration to contain Debris removed from the HVAC system. Such devices shall exhaust in a manner that will not allow contaminants to re-enter the facility. Release of debris outdoors must not violate any outdoor environmental standards, codes or regulations.

4. All methods require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris adhered to interior HVAC system surfaces, such that debris may be safely conveyed to vacuum collection devices. Acceptable methods will include those which will not potentially damage the integrity of the ductwork, nor damage porous surface materials such as liners inside the ductwork or system components.

B. Methods of Cleaning Fibrous Glass Insulated Components: 1. Fibrous glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in any equipment

or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment, while the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure, and not permitted to get wet in accordance with applicable NADCA and NAIMA standards and recommendations.

2. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous glass components and will render the system capable of passing Cleaning Verification Tests (see NADCA Standards).

C. Damaged Fibrous Glass Material 1. If there is any evidence of damage, deterioration, delamination, friable material,

mold or fungus growth, or moisture such that fibrous glass materials cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing with an acceptable insulation repair coating, they shall be identified for replacement.

2. When requested or specified, Contractor must be capable of remediating exposed damaged insulation in air handlers and/or ductwork requiring replacement.

Page 297: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 7 of 9

3. Replacement material: In the event fiber glass materials must be replaced, all materials shall conform to applicable industry codes and standards, including those of UL and SMACNA.

4. Replacement of damaged insulation is not covered by this specification.

D. Biocidal Agents and Coatings 1. Biocidal agents shall only be applied if active fungal growth is reasonably

suspected, or where unacceptable levels of fungal contamination have been verified through testing.

2. Application of any biocidal agents used to control the growth of fungal or bacteriological contaminants shall be performed after the removal of surface deposits and debris.

3. Only biocidal agents registered by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) specifically for use within HVAC system shall be used.

4. Biocidal agents shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

5. Biocidal coating products for both porous and non-porous surfaces shall be EPA registered, water soluble solutions with supporting efficacy data and MSDS records.

6. Biocidal coatings shall be applied according to manufacturer's instructions. Coatings shall be sprayed directly onto interior ductwork surfaces, rather than 'fogged' downstream onto surfaces. A continuous film must be achieved on the surface to be treated by the coating application. Application of any biocidal coatings shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's minimum millage surface application rate standards for effectiveness.

2.06 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION

A. General: Verification of HVAC System cleanliness will be determined after mechanical cleaning and before the application of any treatment or introduction of any treatment-related substance to the HVAC system, including biocidal agents and coatings.

B. Visual Inspection: the HVAC system shall be inspected visually to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 1. If no contaminants are evident through visual inspection, the HVAC system shall

be considered clean; however, the owner reserves the right to further verify system cleanliness through gravimetric or wipe testing analysis testing as specified herein.

2. If visible contaminants are evident through visual inspection, those portions of the system where contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for cleanliness.

C. Gravimetric Analysis: At the discretion and expense of the owner, sections of the HVAC system may be tested for cleanliness using the NADCA Vacuum Test (gravimetric analysis) as specified in applicable NADCA Standards. Levels of debris collected shall be equal to or less than acceptable levels defined in applicable NADCA Standards.

Page 298: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 8 of 9

1. If gravimetric analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than those levels specified in applicable NADCA standards, the system shall be considered clean and shall have passed cleanliness verification.

2. If gravimetric analysis determines that levels of debris exceed those specified in applicable NADCA standards, the system shall not be considered clean and those sections of the system which failed cleanliness verification shall be re-cleaned at the expense of the HVAC system cleaning contractor.

3. Gravimetric analysis shall be performed by a qualified third party experienced in testing of this nature.

4. .Cleanliness verification shall be performed immediately after mechanical cleaning and before the HVAC system is restored to normal operation.

2.07 POST-PROJECT REPORT

A. At the conclusion of the project, the Contractor shall provide a report to the owner indicating the following: 1. Success of the cleaning project, as verified through visual inspection and/or

gravimetric analysis. 2. Areas of the system found to be damaged and/or in need of repair.

2.08 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS The following current standards and publications of the issues currently in effect form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by any reference thereto:

A. National Air Duct Cleaners Association DCA: NADCA 1992-01, "Mechanical Cleaning of Non-Porous Air Conveyance System Components," 1992

B. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): "Understanding Microbial Contamination in HVAC Systems," 1996.

C. National Air Duct Cleaners Association DCA : "Introduction to HVAC System Cleaning Services," 1995.

D. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) NADCA Standard 05 "Requirements for the Installation of Service Openings in HVAC Systems,' 1997.

E. Underwriters' Laboratories &Lj: UL Standard 181

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): Standard 62-89, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"

G. Environmental Protection Agency @PA : "Building Air Quality" December, 1991

H. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): 'HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," 1985

I. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association Glass Insulated Air Duct Systems." 1993

Page 299: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 67 – Duct Cleaning Page 9 of 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where this work is to be performed and determine space conditions and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PERFORMANCE OF WORK

A. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface with other work being performed.

B. Protect all areas and equipment in the areas in which work is to be done, by providing drop cloths and other means.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of duct cleaning, demonstrate compliance with specification requirements. Provide a pre-cleaning and post-cleaning inspection of ductwork interior conditions with fiber-optic borescope through 1" holes in the duct. Provide no less than two (2) photographs, one (1) before and one (1) after, for each approximately 25 ft. of ductwork. Plug holes after pictures are taken. Submit pictures in report form along with sketches and/or drawings identifying locations where pictures were taken.

END OF SECTION 23 05 67

Page 300: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 301: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 93 – Testing and Balancing Page 1 of 5

TESTING AND BALANCING SECTION 23 05 93

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. All piping and equipment shall be tested. Labor including standby electrician, materials, instruments and power required for testing shall be furnished unless otherwise indicated under the particular Section of the Specification.

B. Tests shall be performed in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.

C. In no case shall piping, equipment, or accessories be subjected to pressure exceeding their ratings.

D. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Architects.

E. Any damage resulting from tests to any and all trades shall be repaired and damaged materials replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Architect.

F. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the time prescribed below.

G. Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment, systems, and their controls. Whenever the equipment or system under test is interrelated and depends upon the operation of other equipment, systems and controls for proper operation, functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system being tested.

H. All fans and duct systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of sheaves, dampers, registers and other volume and diverting control devices, to obtain the air quantities indicated on the design drawings. Replace sheaves if required to meet design conditions.

Page 302: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 93 – Testing and Balancing Page 2 of 5

I. All pumps and piping systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of plug cocks, globe valves or other control devices, to obtain flow quantities indicated on the design drawings.

J. Upon completion of the work, a test shall be conducted in the presence and under the direction of a NYS Licensed Professional Engineer, retained by the Contractor, and qualified to conduct such tests. The tests shall show compliance with the code requirements for ventilation and the proper functioning of operating devices, before the system is approved. Tests shall also be conducted under the direction of the same Licensed Professional Engineer to demonstrate that all installed fire and fire smoke dampers operate properly. The Contractor shall submit a letter signed and sealed by the Licensed Professional Engineer indicating that such testing has been successfully conducted and shall make all associated controlled Special Inspections and other submissions to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prior to installation of the mechanical systems, engage the services of an independent air and water balancing firm that shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The firm shall have no affiliation with a mechanical contracting or sheetmetal company. Balancing and testing company shall be a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), National Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB) or Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB). The balancing firm shall have at least one member of its full time staff who is a licensed professional engineer who shall supervise the balancing work. Prior to balancing, a list of instruments to be used shall be submitted to the Architect. All instruments shall be calibrated within six months before tests.

B. Prior to installation of the mechanical systems, the licensed Professional Engineer for the Balancing and Testing Company shall review the contract documents to confirm that all balancing devices are provided to allow for complete balancing of the air and water systems for the project. The Balancing and Testing Company shall submit a letter confirming that they have performed this review and identifying any issues.

After the mechanical systems are installed and before the systems are enclosed behind walls and ceilings, the PE for the Balancing and Testing Company shall perform a review of the installation to verify that the required balancing devices have been installed and that the systems are ready for balancing. The Balancing and Testing Company shall submit a letter confirming that the inspection has been performed and that the system is ready for balancing.

Both letters shall be signed and sealed by the Balancing and Testing Company’s Professional Engineer.

C. When all specified testing and balancing procedures have been completed, a written report shall be submitted to the Architect for review. The report shall be tabulated in standard AABC/TABB format. As part of the Architect's review process, the accuracy of the balancing report shall be field spot checked on a random basis, with the assistance of the balancing firm's project supervisor. The HVAC Contractor shall

Page 303: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 93 – Testing and Balancing Page 3 of 5

reimburse the Architect for all time spent in excess of eight working hours, to demonstrate the accuracy of the balancing report.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work". Submit all test and balancing reports as described hereinafter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEST PREPARATION AND PROCEDURE

A. On initial startup, prior to any tests, check the rotation and running amperage of all fan and pump motors to prevent damage to equipment by overload.

B. Final balancing must be done with all systems completely installed and operating, and after the automatic temperature controls have had their final adjustment.

C. New, clean filters must be installed in all supply systems prior to balancing.

D. All main supply air ducts shall be traversed, using a pitot tube and manometer. The manometer shall be calibrated to read two significant figures in all velocity pressure ranges. Duct traverses shall be conducted using the log-Tchebycheff method. The equal area method is not acceptable.

E. A main duct is defined as either of the following: 1. A duct serving a reheat coil.

F. The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse the total air quantity supplied by the fan and to verify the distribution of air to zones.

G. Upon completion of all air and water balancing, all duct dampers, plug valves and other throttling devices shall be permanently marked in the final adjusted position.

3.02 AIR BALANCE

A. Duct systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of sheaves, dampers, registers and other volume and diverting control devices, to obtain the air quantities indicated on the Drawings. Outside air and return air modulating dampers shall be adjusted to admit the specified quantities of air under all cycles of operation. All final adjusted air quantities shall be within 10% of the design requirements. Replace sheaves if required to meet design conditions.

Page 304: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 93 – Testing and Balancing Page 4 of 5

B. Submit single line diagrams of all duct systems indicating all terminal outlets identified by number. Data sheets shall list all such outlets denoted by the same numbers, including the outlet's size, "K" factor, location, CFM and jet velocity.

C. Submit this data for all supply air systems.

3.03 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM

A. Traverse the main supply ducts ducts to determine CFM deliveries of the fans.

B. Measure the system duct static pressure at selected points throughout the system. Monitoring points shall be in those duct runs which are of the longest equivalent length (greatest friction loss). Monitor these points during the adjusting and balancing procedures to assure proper inlet static pressure is being maintained to the variable volume units.

C. Make preliminary outlet readings and balance the outlets to design CFM and record all readings.

D. Individually set the controls for each variable volume damper to comply with correct sequence of operation.

E. Check the variable volume controller for design delivery. 1. Check all the units, but make no adjustments. Report the results. 2. If check passes, then proceed with balancing. 3. Do all setting and adjusting required. 4. When necessary corrections have been made, a verification test will be required.

F. Adjust the outlets for design delivery.

G. Set all controls to their normal set points and allow all controllers to reach a satisfied state.

H. All above recorded items and readings shall be submitted to the Architect.

3.14 ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM

A. Set the controls for the supply and return fans to operate at maximum capacity and for all variable volume dampers to be at the full open position. Open VAV diffuser dampers by heating up the building so that diffusers call for full cooling.

B. Set the system up to operate with maximum return air and minimum outside air.

C. Set the required number of VAV boxes for systems which have VAV boxes to fully closed or minimum position to account for system diversity. All other boxes shall be fully open. Closed and minimum position boxes should be closest to the supply fan.

D. Set the supply and return fan speed to obtain design air flow or greater.

Page 305: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 05 93 – Testing and Balancing Page 5 of 5

E. Traverse the main supply ducts and return ducts to determine CFM deliveries of the fans.

F. Set the system to operate at 100% outside air for systems capable of 100% OA and check the motor amperage. The motor amperage should remain relatively constant indicating no change in total air flow. If a change in flow does occur, adjust outside air, return air, and relief air dampers accordingly.

G. Measure the system duct static pressure at selected points throughout the system. Monitoring points shall be in those duct runs which are of the longest equivalent length (greatest friction loss). Monitor these points during the adjusting and balancing procedures to assure proper inlet static pressure is being maintained to the variable volume units. Measure and record static pressure downstream of all duct mounted pressure independence modules (PIM) used for VAV diffusers.

H. Adjust the return fan to approximately 5% above design CFM and the supply fan to either 5% above design or to the point where the static pressure at the end of each branch (upstream of PIM) is at required static pressure, whichever condition is reached first.

I. Make preliminary outlet readings and balance the outlets to design CFM and record all readings.

J. Where applicable, individually set the controls for each variable volume box to minimum damper position and measure airflow at each of the outlets. Adjust the damper minimum position so the outlet total CFM is at the design minimum delivery. At the minimum delivery rate, the balance between the outlets may not hold, but no outlet adjustments should be made.

K. For VAV boxes check the variable volume controller for design delivery. 1. Check all the units, but make no adjustments. Report the results. 2. If check passes, then proceed with balancing. 3. When necessary corrections have been made, a verification test will be required. 4. For VAV boxes with an upstream volume damper check that box damper is more

than 50% open at design delivery and that no objectionable noise exists in the rooms served. If necessary, adjust upstream volume damper to achieve these conditions.

5. Measure and record cfm and inlet static pressure for each VAV box.

L. Adjust the outlets for design delivery. For VAV diffusers comply with manufacturer's balancing procedures. The VAV diffuser manufacturer's representative shall provide training in the balancing process.

END OF SECTION 23 05 93

Page 306: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 307: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 1 of 8

INSULATION FOR HVAC WORK SECTION 23 07 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes furnishing and installing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories and services necessary to provide Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Insulation installation, which is complete in every respect and of the composition and quality as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.

1.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Insulate all ductwork except the following portions of ductwork: 1. Ducts provided with sound absorptive lining (except where humidifier is installed

and except where located outdoors) may have external insulation thickness decreased provided overall insulation R-value internal plus external complies with R-value specified herein.

2. All exhaust ductwork, except where otherwise noted. 3. Return air ductwork passing through air conditioned space and/or hung ceiling of

air conditioned space, except in single story buildings and ducts in ceiling of uppermost floor or in attic space, where all return air ducts must be insulated.

4. Return air ductwork for heating and ventilating systems, where return air ducts pass through heated areas.

5. **Supply ducts above hung ceilings where space above hung ceilings is used for return air plenum, except below roof.

6. Exposed supply and return air ducts in air conditioned spaces if same supply air duct serves that area only.

7. Exposed supply air duct in ventilated spaces, if same duct serves that area only.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. "Installer": A firm with at least ten 10 years successful installation experience on projects with piping and ductwork insulation similar to that required for this project.

B. All insulation shall have composite (including insulation jacket or facing and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: 1. Flame Spread 25

Page 308: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 2 of 8

2. Smoke Developed 50 3. Fuel Contributed 50

C. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and cloths for fittings shall have component ratings as listed above. All products shall bear UL labels indicating the above are not exceeded.

D. Provide certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these Specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength.

E. Provide products produced by the manufacturers which are listed in Section 23 05 12, "Approved Manufacturers List"

F. Insulation Materials: Insulating materials manufacturing facilities must be certified and registered with an approved registrar for conformance with ISO9000 quality standard.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and submit shop drawings and samples.

1.06 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site.

B. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp, or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products.

C. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Insulation for Concealed Duct 1. Except where otherwise noted, all concealed rectangular and round ductwork

shall be covered with flexible duct insulation with or without vapor barrier complying with ASTM C553, Types I and II and of the thickness and densities indicated below.

Service R Value With

Page 309: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 3 of 8

Cold and Hot Air Supply Ducts 6 Vapor Barrier

B. Flexible duct insulation with vapor barrier shall be 1 lb. per cu. ft. density glass fiber with a maximum K factor of 0.29 at 75 deg. F. mean temperature, with reinforced foil-faced, flame resistant kraft vapor barrier (facing to comply with ASTM C1136, Type II).

C. Insulation with vapor barrier shall be duct wrap insulation FRK-25, type 100 as made by Owens-Corning or Johns Manville Microlite Type 100 with FSK vapor barrier facing or standard 1 lb./cf duct insulation as made by CGG with FSK facing.

D. Flexible duct insulation without vapor barrier shall be 1 lb. per cu. ft. density glass fiber with a maximum K factor of 0.29 at 75 deg. F. mean temperature and shall be Owens Corning Fiberglass Type 75P, Johns Manville Microlite Type 100 or approved equal.

E. Adhere insulation to duct with Foster fire resistant adhesive 85-60 or Childers CP-127 or approved equal, applied in 4 inch wide transverse strips at 8 inch intervals. Insulation shall be butted with facing overlapping all joints at least 2 inches and sealed with Foster fire resistant adhesive 85-60 or Childers CP-127 or equal. For insulation with vapor barrier use Foster fire resistant vapor barrier adhesive or approved equal and joints without tabs shall be firmly sealed with aluminum foil tape adhered with same adhesive. Secure insulation with 18 gauge corrosion resistant wire spaced not more than 18 inches on center. Coat all duct taped seams, punctures and breaks with Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34 vapor barrier coating.

F. Additionally, secure insulation to bottom of rectangular ducts over 24" wide with welded pins or stick clips on 18" centers. Cut off excess pins and seal as above.

G. Insulation for Exposed Rectangular Duct 1. Except where otherwise noted, all exposed rectangular ductwork and plenums

shall be covered with rigid duct insulation complying with ASTM C612 Types IA and IB and of the thickness and densities indicated below.

Service R Value With

Cold and Hot Air Supply Ducts Except where otherwise noted 6 Vapor Barrier

2. Rigid duct insulation with vapor barrier shall be 6 lbs. per cu. ft. density glass

fiber with maximum K factor of 0.22 at 75 deg. F mean temperature with fire retardant vapor barrier facing all service jacket complying with ASTM C1136 Type I (white finish).

3. Rigid duct insulation with vapor barrier shall be Fiberglass Type 705 by Owens-Corning or Johns Manville, No. 817 spin-glass w/ASJ or approved equal.

4. Rigid duct insulation without vapor barrier shall be 6 lbs. per. cu. ft. density glass fiber with maximum K factor of 0.22 at 75 deg. F mean temperature with fire retardant facing foil reinforced draft. (all service jacket).

Page 310: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 4 of 8

5. Rigid duct insulation without vapor barrier shall be Fiberglass type 705 by Owens-Corning, Johns Manville, No. 817 spin glass w/ASJ or approved equal.

6. Insulation shall be fastened to duct with 12 gauge welded pins and washers, or equivalent as approved. Fasteners shall be spaced 12 to 18 inches on center, a minimum of two rows per side of duct. Secure insulation in place with washers firmly embedded in insulation, or push a self-locking cap over pin after coating with fitting mastic type C by Owens-Corning or approved equal.

7. Seal all joints, breaks and impressions with Foster fire resistant vapor barrier coating Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34, or equal, and apply 5" wide joint sealing tape to all joints. All surface must be clean and dry before applying tape.

H. As an alternative to fiberglass insulation on ducts, elastomeric closed-cell insulation may be used. 1. Insulation material shall be a flexible, closed-cell or conformable elastomeric

insulation in sheet form: AP Armaflex, and AP Armaflex SA. These products meet the requirements as defined in ASTM C 534, “Specification for preformed elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in sheet and tubular form.”

2. Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s or HCFC’s. It is also formaldehyde free, low VOC’s, fiber free, dust free and resists mold and mildew.

3. The insulation material shall contain MICOBAN Antimicrobial additive to aid in the prevention of mold and mildew.

4. Materials shall have a flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, latest revision. In addition, the product, when tested, shall not melt or drip flaming particles, the flame shall not be progressive and all materials shall pass simulated end-use fire tests.

5. Materials shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.25 Btu-in./h-ft2- °F at a 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518, latest revisions.

6. Materials shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of 0.05 perm-inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, latest revision. (other than conformable elastomeric)

7. The material shall be manufactured under an independent third party supervision testing program covering the properties of fire performance, thermal conductivity and water vapor transmission.

8. Adhesives and Finishes a. Adhesive shall be the insulation manufacturer's recommended contact

adhesive: Armaflex 520, Armaflex 520 BLV, Armaflex 520 Black, Low VOC Spray Adhesive or Armaflex HT 625 Adhesive.

b. Insulation finish shall be the insulation manufacturer's recommended finish: Armaflex WB Finish.

c. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same properties as listed above and shall not detract from any of the system ratings as specified above.

Page 311: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 5 of 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where this insulation is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of insulation with other components of systems.

C. All insulating materials shall be applied only by experienced workmen, in accordance with the best covering practice. All piping, duct or equipment shall be blown out, cleaned, tested and painted prior to the application of any covering. Adhesives, sealers and mastics shall not be applied, when the ambient temperature is below 40F,

or surfaces that are wet.

D. All items described in general indicate the type of covering required, however, all piping, ductwork or equipment that transmits heat or will form condensation shall be insulated.

E. Where insulation on existing ductwork has been cut, removed or damaged, this Contractor shall reinsulate as herein specified.

F. All insulation of access doors shall be set in sheet metal double-pan construction.

G. All ductwork shall be insulated in the field, following complete installation of the ductwork. Installation of insulation on the ductwork in the shop (prior to delivery and installation of the ductwork) is prohibited.

H. For installation of elastomeric closed-cell insulation: 1. Piping:

a. Install pipe insulation by slitting tubular sections and applying onto piping or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible, slide unslit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be adhered and sealed using Armaflex 520, 520 BLV or 520 Black Adhesive. When using AP Armaflex SS, only the butt joints shall be adhered using Armaflex 520, 520 BLV or 520 Black Adhesive. Armaflex HT 625 Adhesive shall be used with UT Solaflex.

b. Insulation shall be pushed onto the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints.

Page 312: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 6 of 8

c. Tape the ends of the copper tubing before slipping the Armaflex insulation over the new pipes to prevent dust from entering the pipe.

d. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools such as sharp non-serrated knives must be used.

e. On cold piping, insulation shall be adhered directly to the piping at the high end of the run and every 18 feet, using a two-inch strip of Armaflex 520, 520 BLV or 520 Black Adhesive on the ID of the insulation and on the pipe. All exposed end cuts of the insulation shall be coated with Armaflex 520, 520 BLV, or 520 Black Adhesive. All penetrations through the insulation and termination points must be adhered to the substrate to prevent condensation migration.

f. Sheet insulation shall be used on all pipes larger than 8” IPS. Insulation shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12” IPS, adhere insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. On pipes greater than 24” IPS, complete adhesion is recommended.

g. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. 2. Hangers:

a. Support piping system using high density inserts with sufficient compressive strength. The pipe support insulation shall be elastomeric foam with the same or greater thickness than the pipe insulation. All joints shall be sealed with Armaflex 520, 520 BLV or 520 Black adhesive.

b. Standard and split hangers -- Piping supported by ring hangers shall have hangers insulated with the same insulation thickness as the adjacent pipe. All seams and butt joints shall be sealed with Armaflex 520, 520 BLV or 520 Black Adhesive. Armaflex HT 625 Adhesive shall be used with UT Solaflex. Ring hangers may be sleeved using oversized tubular insulation. On cold piping, insulation shall extend up the hanger rod a distance equal to four times the insulation thickness. Insulation tape may be used to a thickness equal to the adjacent insulation thickness.

c. Clevis hangers or other pipe support systems -- Saddles shall be installed under all insulated lines at unistrut clamps, clevis hangers, or locations where the insulation may be compressed due to the weight of the pipe. All piping shall have wooden dowels or blocks of a thickness equal to the insulation inserted and adhered to the insulation between the pipe and the saddle. It is highly recommended for continuous insulation protection to use hanger sizes equal to the outer diameter of the pipe plus insulation thickness.

d. Armafix IPH or Armafix NPH can be used to prevent compression of insulation at standard split, clevis hangers or other pipe support systems. To minimize the movement of Armafix, it is recommended that a pair of non-skid pads be adhered to the clamps. In addition, to prevent loosening of the clamps, use of an anti-vibratory fastener, such as a nylon-locking nut, is also recommended.

3. Square and Rectangular Ductwork: a. The top of the ductwork must be sloped to prevent “ponding” of water. The

recommendation is at least a 2° angle to the outer side.

Page 313: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 7 of 8

b. Armaflex Sheet Insulation shall be adhered directly to clean, oil-free surfaces with a full coverage of Armaflex 520, 520 Black or Low VOC Spray Adhesive. Armaflex HT 625 Adhesive shall be used with UT Solaflex. AP Armaflex SA shall be adhered directly to clean, oil-free surfaces.

c. The duct insulation shall be constructed from the bottom up, with the top insulation sized to extend over the side insulation. This will form a watershed.

d. Butt-edge seams shall be adhered using Armaflex 520, 520 Black, or HT 625 Adhesive by the compression fit method to allow for expansion/contraction. Leave a 1/2”-wide uncoated border at the butt-edge seams on the duct surface and the insulation surface. Overlap the insulation 1/4” at the butt-edges and compress the edges into place. Apply Armaflex 520, 520 Black or HT 625 Adhesive to the butt-edges of the insulation.

e. Standing metal duct seams shall be insulated with the same insulation thickness as installed on the duct surface. Seams may be covered using strips of Armaflex Sheet Insulation or half sections of tubular pipe insulation with miter-cut ends. Standing seams shall be adhered using Armaflex 520, 520 Black or HT 625 Adhesive.

f. Insulation seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.

4. Round Ductwork: a. AP Armaflex Sheet and Roll Insulation, UT Solaflex Roll Insulation, or NH

Armaflex Sheet and Roll Insulation shall be used on all round ductwork. Insulation shall be wrapped not stretched around the duct. On ductwork larger than 12” in diameter, the insulation shall be adhered to the duct surface on the lower one third. On ductwork greater than 24” in diameter, the insulation shall be completely adhered to the duct surface. Longitudinal seams shall be located on the lower half of any round ductwork.

b. Butt-edge seams shall be adhered using Armaflex 520, 520 Black or HT 625 Adhesive by the compression fit method to allow for expansion/contraction. Leave a 1/2” wide uncoated border at the butt-edge seams on the duct surface and the insulation surface. Overlap the insulation 1/4” at the butt-edges and compress the edges into place. Apply Armaflex 520, 520 Black, or HT 625 Adhesive to the butt-edges of the insulation.

c. Insulation seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.

I. Finish for Exposed Insulation: 1. The term “exposed” is hereby defined as any place outdoors, as well as any

place indoors in Mechanical Rooms, Storage Rooms, Janitor’s Closets, etc., where located within 7 feet of floor or access platforms.

2. As an alternative to the use of 0.016” aluminum cladding on duct insulation, if AP Armaflex insulation is used, the ArmaTuff laminated sheet and roll insulation may be used.

Page 314: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 07 00 – Insulation for HVAC Work Page 8 of 8

ArmaTuff laminated Armaflex sheet and roll insulations may be used for insulating exterior applications such as duct, tanks, vessels and large pipes. Refer to section 3.06 for further installation details. ArmaTuff is a laminate of white polymeric material on Armaflex insulations, which offers durability and resistance to weathering, ultraviolet, acid rain and chemicals. The laminate is 0.013 inches (13 mils) thick. The seams must be installed in compression and sealed with Armaflex 520, or 520 Black contact adhesive. Cover the seams using ArmaTuff 6” Seal Tape.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. The installer of the insulation shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION 23 07 00

Page 315: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 1 of 9

SHEET METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 23 31 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Sheet Metal Ductwork as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabrication and installation shall be by a single firm specializing and experience in metal ductwork for not less than 10 years.

B. Comply with SMACNA=s (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) 2005 AHVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible@, Third Edition recommendations for fabrication, construction and details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Compliance to SMACNA and ASHRAE is a minimum requirement. In case of disagreement between sheet metal work described in this Section and SMACNA or ASHRAE, the specification shall govern.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work and submit shop drawings and coordinate drawings.

B. Before submitting any sheet metal drawings, submit a complete set of shop standards for review and approval. Sheet metal shop drawings may be submitted only after approval of the shop standards.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work.

Page 316: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 2 of 9

1.06 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work.

B. Contractor will guarantee all work for one year from the date of acceptance against all defect in material, equipment and workmanship. This guarantee shall include repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment or workmanship.

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protect shop fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Protect ends of ductwork and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTWORK

A. Furnish and install the size, connections and run of ducts as indicated on the drawings.

B. While the Drawings shall be adhered to as closely as possible, the Architect's right is reserved to vary the run and size of ducts during the progress of the work if required to meet structural conditions.

C. Install all ductwork in strict adherence to the ceiling height schedule indicated on the Architect's Drawings. Consult with the Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors and, in conjunction with the above Contractors, establish the necessary space requirements for each trade.

D. The sheet metal ductwork shall, whether indicated or not, rise and/or drop and/or change in shape to clear any and all conduits, lighting fixtures, piping and equipment to maintain the desired ceiling heights and to provide adequate maintenance room and headroom in mechanical equipment rooms.

E. The ductwork shall be continuous, with airtight joints and seams presenting a smooth surface on the inside and neatly finished on the outside. Ducts shall be constructed with curves and bends so as to affect an easy flow of air. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the inside radius of all curves and bends shall be not less than width of ducts in plane of bend.

F. All rectangular ductwork, unless otherwise noted, shall be built from galvanized sheet steel and thoroughly braced and stiffened. 1. Provide 18" x 18" access doors for every 30'-0" run of supply and return air duct for

cleaning purposes. For ducts whose height or width is less than 20", provide

Page 317: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 3 of 9

access doors which are 18" wide by a height calculated as 2" less than the height of the duct (thereby providing 1" of clearance between the bottom of the access door and the bottom of the duct, and similar for the top).

2.02 DUCT FABRICATION

A. Ducts shall be neatly finished on the outside with all sharp edges removed.

B. Inside surfaces shall be smooth with no projections into the air stream except where otherwise indicated.

C. Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lock at corners or Acme lock on flat surfaces double seams hammered tight and shall be located above the horizontal axis of the duct. A snap lock seam shall not be permitted as a substitute for the Pittsburgh lock at corners of ducts.

D. Transverse joints shall be made airtight with all laps in the directions of air flow.

E. All fasteners and attachments shall be made of the same material as the ducts.

F. Furnish test wells 12" on the center horizontally and vertically in the suction and discharge duct of each fan. Test wells shall consist of a 1" x :", 125 lb., bronze, screwed hex bushing, secured to the duct with a bronze hex locknut on the inside of the duct. A :" x 2" long standard weight bronze, screwed nipple and cap shall be fitted to the housing on the outside of the duct. Test wells shall be No. 699 as made by Ventlok or approved equal.

G. All turns in ductwork shall be accomplished using radius elbows rather than square elbows. Square elbows will only be permitted in instances where the Contractor, through depiction on their sheet metal shop drawings, proves that only a square elbow may be installed due to such limited space availability. All radius elbows shall have a minimum centerline radius of 12 times the width of the duct.

H. All square elbows shall have factory-designed and built single thick turning vanes. Shop fabricated vanes will not be approved. Where turning vanes are in conflict with the access doors to fire dampers, they shall be made movable so that fire dampers shall be accessible.

I. Dissimilar metals shall be connected with flanged joints made up with fiber or neoprene gaskets to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. Flanges shall be fastened with bolts protected by ferrules and washers made of the same materials as the gaskets. Where an aluminum duct is to be connected to a galvanized steel duct, the end of the galvanized steel duct shall be coated with heavy black asphaltum paint before connecting it to the aluminum duct.

J. Changes in shape and dimension shall conform to the following: Except where otherwise noted, for increases in cross-sectional area, the shape of the transformation shall not exceed 1" in 7". Except where otherwise noted, for reductions in area, the slope shall not be less than 1" in 4" but 1" in 7" preferred.

Page 318: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 4 of 9

K. Wherever it may be necessary to make provisions for vertical hangers of the ceiling construction passing through ducts, provide streamlined shaped sleeves around such ceiling construction hangers as to fully protect the duct from being penetrated with holes for the passage of such hangers. Any such streamlined sleeves shall be made air tight at top and bottom of ducts. In no case shall there be more than two rods in any 9 sq. ft. area. No rods shall pierce ducts smaller than 12" in horizontal area.

L. The construction for low pressure rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be made in accordance with recommendations of ASHRAE Guide, Latest Edition, or as per SMACNA Manual but not less than the following weights and construction:

LOW PRESSURE - RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

Dimension Longest Side

Inches

Sheet Metal Gauge All Four Sides

Transverse Reinforcing at Joints and Between Joints

Steel Gaug

e

Aluminum Thickness

In.

Copper Oz. Per Sq. Ft.

Up thru 12 26 0.020 16 1" pocket lock 24 gauge, standing seam joint 24 gauge, 1" standing S slip 24 gauge. Joint max. on 8 ft. centers.

13 thru 18 24 0.025 24 Same as for up thru 12.

19 thru 30 24 0.025 24 1" pocket lock 22 gauge. Joints max, on 8 ft. centers with 1 x 1 x c in. angles 4 feet from joint.

31 thru 42 22 0.032 32 Same as for 19 thru 30.

43 thru 54 22 0.032 32 1" standing S slip 22 gauge with 12" x 12" x c in. angles, 12" standing seam joint, 12" pocket lock 22 gauge. Joints on 8 ft. centers with 12 x 12 x c in. angles max. 4 feet from joint.

55 thru 60 20 0.040 36 Same as for 43 thru 54.

61 thru 84 20 0.040 36 1" standing S slip gauge with 12 x 12 x c in. angles, 12 standing seam joint, with 12 x 12 x c in. angels, 12 in. pocket lock 22 gauge with 12 x 12 x c in. angels. Joints max. on 8 ft. centers with 12 x 12 x c in. angels max on 2 ft. centers.

85 thru 96 18 0.050 48 Same as for 61 thru 84 except all angles shall be 12 x 12 x 3/16 in.

over 96 18 0.050 48 Same as for 61 thru 84 except all angles shall be 2 x 2 x 3 in.

1. Flat areas of duct over 18 in. wide shall be stiffened by cross breaking of beading. 2. All joints to have corner closures.

Page 319: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 5 of 9

3. All joints (longitudinal and transverse) shall be sealed with Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or 3M EC-800 mastic or equal UL181A approved mastic, to provide sealing equivalent to SMACNA Seal Class A.

M. The construction for low pressure round sheet metal ducts and fittings shall be as follows:

Girth Reinforcing

Duct Diameter Inches

Steel-Galv Sheet Gage

Minimum Reinforcing Angle Size & Maximum Longitudinal Spacing

Girth Joints (Continuously Welded

or as Below)

Up thru 8 26 None required Crimped and beaded joint

9 thru 13 26 None required Crimped and beaded joint

14 thru 22 24 None required Crimped and beaded joint

23 thru 36 22 None required --

37 thru 50 20 13 x 13 x c @ 72 in.

--

51 thru 60 18 13 x 13 x c @ 72 in.

--

61 thru 84 16 12 x 12 x c @ 72 in.

--

NOTE: Flanged joints may be considered as girth reinforcing.

1. Ductwork up to 36 in. diameter shall be spiral lockseam construction and it shall be assembled with prefabricated fittings made up of 20 gauge galvanized iron.

2. All joints (longitudinal and transverse) shall be sealed tight with EC-800 to provide sealing equivalent to SMACNA Seal Class A. Joints shall, in addition, be fastened with self-tapping screws.

2.03 FLEXIBLE RUN-OUTS

A. The flexible run-out duct shall meet all requirements of the National Fire Protection Association 90A - Latest Edition. 1. Flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50.

B. Each flexible run-out shall be sealed to its male outlets on both ends with Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or 3M EC-800 sealer, or sealing compound as recommended by the flexible air duct manufacturer. The flexible air duct shall be sealed and covered to a minimum depth of 2 inches of its mating metal coupling, branch take-off lap or duct at each of its ends. A Wraplock Ideal No. 5900 Strap-Clamp shall be furnished and installed at each end of the flexible duct.

C. Complete installation shall be airtight.

D. Flexible ducts shall be rated and labeled to the requirements of UL 181 for Class 0 or Class 1 flexible air ducts and shall be so identified.

Page 320: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 6 of 9

E. Flexible ducts shall be terminated with stainless steel band clamps at duct takeoff, terminal box or diffuser. Plastic strap locks are not acceptable.

2.04 DAMPERS

A. At each main branch take-off and in such other locations where required to properly balance the system, provide volume dampers of the opposed blade, multi-louvered type, which shall be operated by indicating locable quadrants and set screws, for adjusting the system.

B. Volume dampers shall be constructed as follows: Damper blades shall not be wider than 12", shall be complete with heavy angle iron frames, connecting and operating links, brass trunnions, and bronze bearings. Dampers, unless otherwise noted, shall be fabricated with not less than No. 16 gauge sheet steel. Blades shall overlap and shall be provided with continuous stops on all four sides of dampers to prevent leakage. Blades shall be galvanized. Blades of dampers shall be set into a flat steel frame with frame securely bolted to the duct. All dampers shall be fitted with a hexagonal brass spindle which shall extend through the exterior of duct and be fitted with an indicating self-locking regulator. Regulator shall be similar to Ventlok 641 or approved equal. All hardware shall be Ventlok or approved equal. For insulated ductwork provide No. 644 self-locking regulator as made by Ventlok or approved equal.

2.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings all metal diffusers, grilles and registers of the sizes and capacities indicated.

B. Ceiling diffusers shall be selected to diffuse the air uniformly throughout the occupied space. The air shall be introduced at a temperature differential of 20 deg. F and shall be diffused at the five (5) foot level to a velocity of not greater than 50 FPM and a temperature differential of not greater than 2 deg. F. when compared with mean room temperature. The sound power level of air distribution equipment devices shall not exceed ratings as shown by Titus Corp. data.

C. All ceiling diffusers shall be furnished with a device or devices equalize the air flow and control the volume.

D. Location of ceiling diffusers and registers shown on the drawings are approximate. Coordinate with the acoustic tile ceiling Sub-Contractor for exact locations of ceiling diffusers and registers. They shall be in accordance with approved ceiling layout shop drawings.

E. All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be coated with baked aluminum enamel, baked flat white (W-1), or baked gloss white (W-4) unless otherwise indicated.

F. All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided without an integral shut-off damper.

G. Each air supply outlet shall have the required capacity and shall be guaranteed to give the required draft with draftless diffusion. Where manufacturer's recommendations

Page 321: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 7 of 9

require duct sizes differing from those on the drawings, the same shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

H. All grilles, registers and diffusers must be tested under ADC standards and carry and ADC seal of approval.

I. Relocations of ceiling diffusers or registers in order to match the ceiling tile layout shall be made at no additional cost to Owner.

2.06 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL

A. It is the intent of this Specification that noise levels due to air conditioning and/or ventilating equipment, ducts, grilles and registers, diffusers and air light fixtures, will permit attaining sound pressure levels in occupied spaces conforming to the following NC curves as explained in the ASHRAE Guide and Data Book.

Room Type NC Level

Classroom NC 25-35

B. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers 1. The maximum permissible sound power levels of air terminal devices when

installed and operating per plans and specifications shall be as follows:

Maximum PWL re 10-12 Watts

Octave Band NC-30 NC-35 NC-40

1 62 64 66

2 52 56 60

3 44 49 54

4 41 46 51

5 38 43 48

6 37 42 47

7 36 41 46

8 37 42 47

C. Sound Power Levels for air outlets and inlets shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where ductwork is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

Page 322: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 8 of 9

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK

A. Install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that ductwork complies with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation or ductwork with other components of systems.

C. Duct sizes shown on the drawings at connection to fans or other equipment may vary in actual installation. Contractor shall provide transition pieces as required.

D. Ducts, casings and hangers shall be installed straight and level and shall be free of vibration and noise when fans are operating.

E. Ducts at ceilings shall be suspended from inserts in concrete slabs except where otherwise indicated. Inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 279, 282, or 152 as required. Ducts at floor shall be supported by steel angles suitably anchored to floor construction. Each duct shall be independently supported and shall not be hung from or supported by another duct, pipe, conduit or equipment of any trade.

F. Supports shall be placed at each joint and change in direction up to a maximum spacing of 8 feet on centers. Prevent buckling of ductwork.

G. All fastenings to building structure shall be adequate to insure permanent stability of sheet metal work and shall be capable of resisting all applied forces.

H. Rigid connections between ductwork and non-rotating equipment shall be made with flanged joints, sealed with fireproof material (Fiber or Neoprene gaskets).

3.03 DUCT HANGERS

A. Low pressure ducts up to 24" on a side or up to 20" diameter shall be suspended with 16 gauge, galvanized strap hangers, 1" wide.

B. Low pressure ducts 25" to 40" on a side or 21" to 42" diameter shall be suspended with galvanized strap hangers 1" wide by c" thick.

C. Strap hangers shall be bent 90, extended down sides of ducts and turned under bottom

of ducts a minimum of 2". Strap hangers shall be fastened at ceiling with nuts, bolts and lock washers and to sides and bottom of ducts with sheet metal screws.

D. All steel ductwork 43" and larger on a side or diameter shall be suspended with either steel angle type hangers with rod and trapeze.

E. No screws shall penetrate medium and high pressure ductwork.

F. For any ducts which require seismic bracing, provide trapeze and rod type hangers regardless of duct size.

Page 323: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 23 31 13 – Sheet Metal Ductwork Page 9 of 9

G. Trapeze type hangers shall have steel rods threaded at both ends and bottom bracing angles on ducts, with nuts and lock washers. Threaded rod diameter shall be as scheduled on the drawings based on the size of the duct supported.

H. Angle type hangers shall be extensions of side bracing angles on ducts, bent 90 at

ceiling and fastened with nuts, bolts and lock washers.

I. The minimum spacing intervals for all duct supports shall be as scheduled on the drawings based on the size of the duct supported.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances, which might cause corrosion, deterioration of metal or interfere with painting.

B. At end of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering.

C. Cleaning of new and existing supply ductwork: After completion of ductwork installation clean ductwork as follows. 1. Cover all supply registers and diffusers with oil cheese cloth. 2. Use supply fan or install temporary fan to provide air to the system for four (4)

hours. 3. Remove oil cheese cloth.

END OF SECTION 23 31 13

Page 324: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 325: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 1 of 9

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 26 05 12

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the best available standards at the scale required.

D. Power riser diagrams, as well as schematic diagrams, generally indicate connections to be used for various systems and equipment. Systems conduit and wiring shall be as required for the actual systems installed on this Project. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to secure the provisions of all material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to install complete, tested, and ready for operation the Electrical Systems in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. All systems shall be complete with all necessary appurtenances and minor auxiliaries, including pull boxes, offsets to clear interferences, and supports which are not shown but are needed to make each system complete in every respect. All work described in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice versa, shall be furnished in complete working order. If mention has been omitted of any item of work or material, necessary for completion of the system, then such items must be and are hereby included. 1. Panelboards - lighting, power and distribution. 2. Fuses and/or circuit breakers. 3. Installation and wiring of individual controllers. Erecting starter racks where required. 4. Safety and disconnect switches, unless furnished with starters or on equipment.

Weatherproof devices for outdoor equipment. 5. Motor power wiring. 6. Raceways and installation components. 7. Wire and Cable. 8. Electrical work in connection with equipment specified and furnished under other

Sections of the Specifications, or furnished by the Owner under separate contracts or direct purchase.

9. Grounding system in conformance with applicable codes. 10. Wiring devices. 11. Furnishing of access doors. 12. Furnishing and setting of all sleeves through the floors, roof and wall, where required

including waterproofing and fireproof sealing and cap flashing.

Page 326: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 2 of 9

13. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the fire resistance rating of any rated wall, ceiling or floor for which his work partially or fully penetrates. Work which could potentially penetrate or breach a rated wall, ceiling or floor include, but are not limited to flush-mounted recessed panel boards, conduit and pipe, ducts, equipment, supports or reinforcements. For any such situation, the Contractor shall provide the necessary fire stopping material, insulation or system in order to maintain the fire rating of the wall, ceiling or floor. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the building construction drawings, including those of the architectural and structural trades, in order to determine the fire resistance ratings for the walls, floors and ceilings for which their work will partially or fully penetrate.

14. Hardware, such as inserts, bolts, etc., associated with concrete pads. 15. Cutting and core drilling associated with electrical work. 16. Prime painting, where required for electrical equipment and installation. 17. Removal of existing electrical work in accordance with removals drawings or as

directed and required. Restoration of electrical service in affected adjoining areas which are to continue to function.

18. Provision for temporary light and power. 19. Paying all fees as required by governing agency and performing all testing as

required by governing agency and adjusting and furnishing all certificates of approval, and those of Underwriters.

20. Modification to alarm and signaling systems, including the following: a. Modification to Fire alarm, smoke and heat detection, sprinkler alarm systems. b. Furnishing, installing and connecting of all alarm initiating and signaling

devices, except as noted hereinafter: 1) Installation of duct smoke detectors.

c. All fan shutdown wiring and furnishing, installing and connecting relay cabinets required for fan shutdown.

d. Telephone empty conduit system, including terminal cabinets and plywood backboards.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. The following items of materials and labor will be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications and shall be excluded from the work to be furnished by this Contractor: 1. Furnishing and setting of motors, adjusting thermal elements and replacing thermal

overloads if necessary. Supplying of individual starters and control devices, unless specifically indicated otherwise. This Contractor shall ascertain that combination starters are obtained and installed where so identified on the Electrical Drawings.

2. Installation of electric valves, float switches and pressure and pneumatic- electric switches, stats and related control devices.

3. Installation of duct type smoke detectors. 4. Base flashing for conduits passing through roof. 5. Setting of access doors in walls and ceilings. 6. Rough and finish patching. 7. Finish painting of exposed conduits, boxes, hangers, apparatus, etc.

Page 327: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 3 of 9

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS

A. The complete installation shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements and standards of National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), New York City Electrical Code (NYCEC), National Electrical Code (NEC), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), American National Standard Institute (ANSI), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Electrical Safety Code, Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), Factory Insurance Association (FIA), National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation", Local Inspection Agency, Local Power Company, Local Telephone Company, along with state and local municipal codes and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Any items or requirements noted in the Specifications or on Drawings, which conflict with these shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. All work necessary to comply with these requirements shall be performed by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. Where reference is made to the National Electrical Code only, without mention of the New York City Electrical Code, the requirements of the latter, where they differ from the former, shall take precedence, where applicable.

C. All electrical equipment, materials and appliances shall have the listing of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear labels attesting to UL listing, and types approved by Municipal Departments having jurisdiction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.

B. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or that of another contractor.

C. Submit shop drawings complete in every detail for items as described in the Contract Documents, or as may be required by the Engineer.

D. Submit shop drawings as indicated in subsequent Sections of this Specification.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS ON PREMISES

A. Before submitting his bid, this Contractor shall visit the site of the work and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with the observable existing conditions affecting the work. No additional compensation will be granted on account of extra work made necessary by the Contractor's failure to investigate such existing conditions. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions and clearances at the site.

B. Examine all work prepared by others to receive the work of this Section and report any discrepancies and/or defects affecting installation to the General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.

Page 328: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 4 of 9

C. Existing conditions, equipment, material, and sizes are shown for reference only. Verify existing conditions and bring any discrepancies to Engineer's attention in writing prior to submission.

1.07 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect, remove and/or relocate electrical material, equipment, devices, components, and other work noted and required by demolition or alterations in existing construction.

B. Provide new material and equipment required for relocated equipment.

C. Remove conductors from existing raceways to be rewired. Clean raceways as required prior to rewiring.

D. Tape both ends of abandoned conductors, and cap outlets and abandoned raceways.

E. Cut and cap abandoned floor raceways flush with concrete floor or behind walls and ceilings.

F. Dispose of removed raceways and wiring.

G. Dispose of removed electrical equipment as directed.

H. All electrical work in adjoining areas which is indicated on the Drawings to continue to function but is affected by demolition work shall be reconnected and restored to present function as part of the electrical system of the Buildings.

I. Connect new work to existing work in a neat and acceptable manner, with minimum interference to existing facilities.

J. Maintain continuous operation of existing facilities affected by the work.

K. Alarm and emergency systems are to be interrupted only with the written consent of the Owner.

L. Temporary shutdowns when required, to be made only with written consent of Owner at times not to interfere with normal operations.

M. All raceways which become exposed beyond finished surfaces because of the alteration work shall be removed and rerouted behind finished surfaces.

N. Wiring that is to be removed as a result of demolition work, but is required to continue to function, shall be interrupted at convenient locations, rerouted (new wiring and conduits) and reconnected for continuation of their original function. New wiring extensions shall match existing ones in all respects, conductor ampacity, conduit size, etc.

Page 329: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 5 of 9

1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of all other Contracts, the Utility Company and the Telephone Company, and shall be so arranged that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of each respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Contract so that generally all construction work can proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay. All communications of a coordinating nature to the Engineer shall be via the Construction Manager or General Contractor.

B. Examine all Architectural, Structural, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Drawings relating to this Project, and verify all governing conditions at the site and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.

C. Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of equipment have been taken from typical equipment items of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work, the Contractor shall carefully check all dimensions and sizes and shall assume full responsibility for the fitting-in of equipment and materials to the building and to meet architectural and structural conditions.

D. Coordinate work with other disciplines. Confer with other contractors whose work might affect this installation; and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work and equipment of others, with the building construction and with architectural finish so that this work will harmonize in service, appearance, and function.

E. Exposed piping shall be installed to provide the maximum amount of headroom but in no case shall piping be installed less than seven feet (8'-0") above the finished floor. Piping installed in areas where hung ceilings or other furred spaces are indicated shall be installed concealed.

F. The Contractor is referred to the Architectural Drawings for locations and types of hung ceilings and furred spaces.

1.09 INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. At the time of the final inspection and tests, all connections at the panels and all splices, etc., must have been completed. All fuses must be in place and the circuits continuous from service switches to all receptacles, outlets, motors, etc. Each entire wiring system must test free from short circuits and grounds. When wiring systems are "megger" tested, the insulation resistance between conductors and between conductors and grounds, based on maximum load, shall not be less than that required by National Electrical Code and local authorities having jurisdiction. A written record of all test data shall be supplied to the Engineer (five copies). The tests shall cover but not be limited to the following: 1. Modifications to the electrical service and distribution system. 2. Modifications to the Fire alarm, smoke detection and sprinkler alarm systems. 3. Power installations and motor controls. 4. Light installations and circuit switching.

Page 330: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 6 of 9

5. Any part of the work called for in the Specifications, or Drawings and as designated by the Engineer or Engineers.

B. Provide all necessary testing equipment, instruments, and skilled personnel for the tests. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of such tests show that the work has not complied with the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings, the Contractor shall make all additions or changes necessary to put the system in proper working condition and shall pay for all the expenses and for all subsequent tests which are necessary to determine whether the work is satisfactory. Any additional work or subsequent tests shall be carried out at the convenience of the Owner, prior to final payment.

1.10 PERMITS, CERTIFICATES AND FEES

A. Obtain and deliver a final Certificate of Approval from the applicable inspection authority having jurisdiction. Make delivery to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner upon completion of the work and before final payment. Pay all charges made by the inspection authority and include their cost in the bid.

B. This work shall include the procurement of and payment for all permits, certificates and fees for the performance of the electrical work in compliance with codes, applicable laws and municipal regulations including those from local utilities for services.

1.11 PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND PRODUCT HANDLING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical equipment shall be delivered and stored at the site, properly packed and crated until finally installed. Store materials in spaces as designated by the General Contractor. Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. If necessary, equipment shall be shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through restricted spaces.

B. Uninstalled and installed equipment and materials shall be adequately protected against loss or stealing; damage caused by water, paint, fire, plaster, moisture, acids, fumes, dust or other environmental conditions; or physical damage, during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. This Contractor shall replace any damage or stolen material without extra cost to the Owner.

C. Provide effective protection for all material and equipment against damage that may be caused by environmental conditions. Do no work when conditions of temperature in area or moisture on materials or substrates are not in accordance with material manufacturer's recommended conditions for installation.

D. This Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all equipment and systems installed, until final acceptance by the Engineer and the Owner. The Operation of the equipment by the Owner does not constitute an acceptance of the work. Work will be accepted only after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment, demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and has furnished all required certificates.

Page 331: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 7 of 9

E. This Contractor shall guarantee in writing to the Owner that all work installed by him shall be free of defects in workmanship and materials and that all apparatus will develop the capacities and characteristics as indicated, and that, if during a period of one year from date of final approval of work by the Engineer, any defects in workmanship, materials or performance appear, he will remedy them without any cost to the Owner. Guarantee requirements shall consist of the aforestated and other requirements, as established under applicable Contract Documents.

F. Provide effective protection against damage for all material and equipment during shipment, and storage at the Project Site. Cover all stored equipment to exclude dust and moisture. Place stored conduit on dunnage with appropriate weather cover and caps on exposed ends.

G. After cabinets and boxes are installed, cover openings to prevent entrance of water and foreign materials. Close conduit openings with temporary metal or plastic caps, including those terminated in cabinets.

H. Protect all rough and finished floors and other finished surfaces from damage which may be caused by construction materials and methods. Protect floors with tarpaulins, chip pans and oil-proof floor covering. Protect finished surfaces from welding and cutting splatters with baffles and asbestos splatter blankets. Protect finished surfaces from paint droppings, adhesive and other marring agents with drop cloths. Protect other surfaces with appropriate protective measures.

I. Have materials delivered to site. Unload and store materials in designated location, and protect from damage. Deliver materials to their point of installation.

J. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's name and product identification clearly marked thereon.

1.12 ACCESSIBILITY AND MEASUREMENTS

A. All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the plans may be made to accomplish this, subject to the approval or the Engineers.

B. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the Building, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same as related to the work under this Contract.

1.13 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Electric services for temporary light and power shall be obtained from the nearest existing panelboard and extended as required. Consult the Owner prior to making any connections to existing services.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the temporary lighting and power system for all Contractors. The use of electricity shall be kept to a minimum.

Page 332: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 8 of 9

C. The Owner or Owner's Representative will pay for all energy required by the temporary lighting and power system.

D. Provide all wiring, supports, lamp sockets, receptacle sockets and any other materials, supplies or equipment necessary for temporary light and power system.

E. Ground fault protection required by OSHA for temporary receptacle circuits shall be accomplished by providing branch circuit panels containing ground fault protection branch circuit breakers.

F. Provide a grounding conductor connection to each receptacle grounding terminal. Minimum size branch circuit and grounding conductors shall be No. 12 AWG.

G. Provide sufficient supplementary temporary lighting to permit proper execution of the work.

H. Keep the temporary lighting and power system operational commencing fifteen (15) minutes before the established starting time of that trade which starts work earliest in the morning and ending fifteen (15) minutes after the established quitting time of that trade which stops work latest in the evening. This applies to all weekdays, Monday through Friday inclusive, which are established as regular working days for any trade engaged in the work, and shall continue until Final Acceptance of the work or until these services are ordered terminated by the Owner or the Owner's Representative.

1.14 NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish a nameplate for each separately installed feeder switch and circuit breaker, each individual panel, disconnect switch, starter push-button station and equipment enclosure.

B. Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be black laminate with white letters of uniform size consisting of reasonably large caps, easily visible.

C. Inscriptions shall consist of name and number of equipment as shown on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.

1.15 NAMES AND TRADE NAMES

A. Where trade and manufacturers' names are specified or indicated on the Drawings, they are intended to indicate the standard of material or articles required. This shall not remove the responsibility of the Contractor from verifying the equipment's compliance with all rules and regulations governing the use of such equipment. No purchase of any equipment shall be done without written authorization, if such equipment will not abide with all rules and regulations, covering its intended use.

1.16 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All material shall be new and of the best quality and shall have the Underwriters Laboratories label attached. The label shall be of the type for the intended application. The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the

Page 333: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work Page 9 of 9

direction of, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer who will interpret the meaning of the Drawings and Specifications. The Engineer shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in his opinion, is not in full accordance therewith.

B. If, after installation, operation of the equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to the Owner by reason of defects, errors or omissions, the Owner reserves the right to operate equipment until it can be removed from service for correction by Contractor. Contractor shall pay for damages to work of other trades caused by this defective equipment and its replacement.

1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL WORK)

A. Two months prior to the completion of all work and the final inspection of the installation by the Owner, five copies of a complete Instruction Manual, bound in booklet form and suitably indexed, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All written material contained in the Manual shall be typewritten or printed.

B. The Manual shall contain the following items: 1. Table of Contents 2. Introduction - Explanation of manual and its use. 3. Description of system or equipment.

a. Complete schematic drawings of all systems. b. Functional and sequential description of all systems.

4. Systems Operation a. Operation procedures. b. All posted instruction charts.

5. Maintenance a. Systems trouble-shooting charts b. Procedures for checking out functions. c. Recommended list of spare parts.

6. Listing of Manufacturers 7. Manufacturer's Data (where multiple model, type and size listings are included,

clearly and conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation. a. Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts,

technical data, etc. b. Operation c. Maintenance - including complete trouble-shooting charts d. Parts list e. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of recommended repair and

service companies. f. Guarantee data.

END OF SECTION 26 05 12

Page 334: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 335: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 1 of 7

WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS) SECTION 26 05 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The requirements of this Section apply to wire and cable work specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

B. The work includes providing wire and cable complete with all accessories in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system. Wiring size referenced in this Section shall be AWG, except as noted. For special wiring for individual systems refer to respective Sections of these Specifications.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. "Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of wire and cable of specified types and ratings, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Refer to PART 2 of this Section for "APPROVED MANUFACTURERS".

B. Provide wire and cable which has been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, and comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards.

C. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70) and local electrical codes which apply for construction and installation of wire and cable. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive code shall apply.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work, and submit shop drawings.

Page 336: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 2 of 7

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Wire and Cable under 600 Volts

B. For Wire and Cable: 1. South Wire Cable 2. Essex 3. Service Wire 4. Alcan 5. ATC Cable Systems, Inc.

C. For Wire and Cable Termination and Connections: 1. Thomas and Betts Corp. 2. Burndy Corp. 3. Elastimold 4. G&W Electric Co.

2.02 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE

A. Conductors:

B. All conductors shall be copper.

C. No. 10 and smaller conductors shall be ASTM Standard, solid, copper. No. 8 and larger conductors shall be ASTM standard, stranded copper.

D. Communications and signal wiring shall conform to the recommendations of the system manufacturers and shall be as specified in respective Sections of these Specifications.

E. Insulation:

F. Rubber and thermoplastic insulation shall comply with ASTM and IPCEA standards.

G. Minimum insulation shall be UL rated for 90oC. Types THWN, USE, RH, RHW.

H. Insulation rated 90oC may be used in lieu of the above. Types FEP, MI, PFA, THHN, XHHW.

I. Conductor ampacity rating shall be based on 75oC insulation.

Page 337: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 3 of 7

J. Types and application: 1. DHN or XTHW shall be used for interior branch circuit and feeder wiring. 2. THWN and THHN may be provided for rewiring in existing conduit. 3. Conductors with insulation rated 90oC shall be provided in high ambient

temperature areas and for branch circuit wiring connecting the fluorescent fixtures.

4. Type SFF-2 conductors shall be provided in wiring channels at continuous fluorescent fixtures and in ambient temperatures over 90oC.

K. Wire Sizes

L. For General Use: 1. No. 12 minimum copper wire shall be used for lighting and power. 2. No. 10 minimum copper wire shall be used for 15 Ampere circuits, at 120 Volts,

over 90 ft. in length, and for 20 Ampere circuit, at 120 Volts, over 60 ft. in length.

M. For Control and Alarm Wiring, unless otherwise noted: 1. No. 14 minimum copper wire. 2. No. 12 minimum copper wire for 120 Volt circuits over 60 ft. in length.

N. For Other Voltages and Phases and for Longer Circuit Lengths: 1. Size wire as required to maintain NEC (NYCEC) permissible voltage drop.

O. Raceways: 1. Increase raceway sizes for larger wire sizes in conformance with NEC

requirements.

P. Color Coding

Q. Phase wires shall be color-coded as follows: 1. 120/208 Volt system:

Black - A phase Red - B phase Blue - C phase

R. Neutral conductors shall be white for 120/208 Volts.

S. Equipment ground wire shall have a green outer covering throughout.

T. Where color-coded cable is not available, certify in writing and request permission for overlap color taping conductors (minimum length 6 in.) in accessible locations.

U. Conductors for control circuits and signal systems shall also be consistently color coded to avoid confusion and permit easy identification of conductors. The IPCEA color code shall be used wherever possible. No two wires in the same raceway shall be the same color, unless provided with flameproof linen identification tags on each end.

Page 338: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 4 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NYCEC, The National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.

B. 600 Volt Wire and Cable:

C. Wire and cable shall not be drawn into conduit and raceways until all conduit work is complete, joints made up tightly and the entire run secured in place.

D. The inside of conduits and raceways shall be dry and clean before conductors are pulled.

E. Care shall be exercised in pulling to avoid damage to the wire or cable. Lubricants shall be used for pulling wire or cable if the character of the pull might otherwise damage the conductors, insulation or jacket. No thermoplastic wires shall be pulled at temperatures lower than 0oC.

F. Cables shall be supported at the upper end of all risers and at intermediate points as required by the NEC. Supports shall be O.Z. Type "R", insulation wedges or Kellens grips, or approved equal.

G. Seal conduit with a non hardening compound approved for the purpose, where cable or wire enter building from underground.

H. Cable spacers shall be installed where required. Spacers shall consists of galvanized or cadmium plates, steel or malleable iron threaded conduit and fittings and insets of non-metallic insulating material with openings adequate to accommodate cables being spaces. Cable spaces shall be O.Z. Mfg. Co., Inc. Type E or Type EL, with grounding lug, or approved equal.

I. Not more than 3 lighting or convenience receptacle circuits shall be installed in one (1) conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

J. Provide individual raceways for two pole ungrounded circuits.

K. In certain systems, equipment furnished by an approved manufacturer may require a different number and arrangement of conductors from those indicated on the Drawings. In such cases, the Contractor for the work under this Division shall comply with such requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

L. In the event the Contractor for the work under this Division or Section chooses to furnish and install a system or item of equipment of different arrangement from that shown or specified, he shall furnish and install any additional wiring and conduit required by the system at no additional cost to the Owner.

Page 339: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 5 of 7

M. In wireways and large pull boxes, lace and tie off conductors in groups of 3 phases and neutral (if used) to limit conductor unbalanced loading. Conductor group shall be as installed in conduit.

N. Tag all feeders and risers in all pull boxes and in all gutter spaces through which they pass. Tags shall be engraved white core nameplates identifying feeders as shown on the Drawings or the circuit protective device from which they originate.

O. Leave all wires with sufficient slack at terminals ends for convenient connections and fixtures and for convenient servicing. Stow loose ends neatly in outlet box.

P. Terminations, Splices and Connections:

Q. Splices and taps shall be made in accessible boxes, panelboard fittings, gutters, terminal panels, etc. only. Materials shall be compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the cables and wires.

R. All copper conductors No. 8 & larger shall be terminated, spliced, and tapped with color-keyed compression connectors, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co., Series 54000, Ideal Industries Series 87000, or approved equal. The manufacturers recommended tooling shall be used. Mechanical type connectors shall not be used.

S. All copper conductors No. 10 AWG & smaller shall be terminated and spliced with Ideal Industries wing-nut wire connectors, or approved equal compression connectors. The flame-retardant, thermoplastic insulated type shall be used to isolate the terminal from other metal parts and equipment.

T. Splices and joints shall be insulated with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulation shall be not less than that of the conductors being joined.

U. Plastic electrical insulating tape shall be flame retardant, cold and weather resistant.

V. Cable Tying:

W. All circuit and control wiring in cabinets, panels, pullboxes, wireways, and junction boxes shall be tied and held with nylon Ty-Rap cable ties as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co., or approved equal.

X. Wire identification ties fastened to conductors at the point of attachment to terminal blocks and equipment components shall be nylon, self-locking Ty-Raps as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co., and Ideal Industries Series Ty-51M, 53M, or approved equal.

Y. Tags:

Page 340: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 6 of 7

Z. Cables shall be tagged in all wireways, pull boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of panels. Where two or more circuits run to or through a control device, outlet box or junction box, each circuit shall be tagged as a guide in making connections.

AA. Tags for feeders shall indicate feeder number, size, phase, voltage, origin and termination. Feeder tags shall identify all phases individually.

BB. Tags for control and alarm wiring shall indicate type of control or alarm, size of wire and origin and termination.

CC. Tags shall be Thomas Betts Co., Ideal Industries, wire-marker dispenser type, self laminated wire markers.

DD. Lubrication:

EE. Wire lubricating compound shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit with which it is used, and shall not harden or become adhesive. Lubricating compound shall be Ideal Industries Yellow 77 Type, or approved equal. Lubricating compound shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.

FF. Inspection:

GG. Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which wire and cable are to be installed, and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

HH. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

II. Installation:

JJ. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

B. Inspect for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single line diagram.

C. Cable connections shall be tightened using a calibrated torque wrench.

D. Electrical Test:

E. Megger conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for continuity and insulation tests before connection to utilization devices for the following: 1. 100 percent of feeders 2. 10 percent of branch circuits

Page 341: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts) Page 7 of 7

3. 100 percent of 3-phase motor branch circuits.

F. Verify phase rotation for all 3-phase motor circuits.

G. Perform tests prior to connecting equipment and in presence of authorized representatives.

H. Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior to, during, and after the high potential tests, including placing warning signals and preventing people and equipment from being exposed to the test voltages.

I. Submit certified written report of test results to Architect.

J. Correct installation of or replace cable testing below manufacturer's standards.

K. Subsequent to wire hook-ups, energize circuit and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 05 19

Page 342: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 343: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems Page 1 of 5

POWER, CONTROL AND ALARM WIRING SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 24

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all power wiring from service equipment to distribution and utilization equipment, and control and alarm wiring for equipment and systems within the building, except as noted, in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Power, control, and alarm wiring systems (NFPA 70) for construction and installation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work, and submit shop drawings.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS

A. Raceways and installation components shall be as specified in Section Raceway and Installation Components.

2.02 CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors shall be as specified in Section Wire and Cable.

Page 344: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems Page 2 of 5

2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS

A. Disconnect switches and manual motor starters shall be as specified in another Section of the Specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine locations where power, control and alarm wiring is to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practice to ensure that equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purpose.

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to coordinate installation of wiring with other components of system.

C. Installation shall comply with the requirements of NEC and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installations".

D. Install distribution system for light and power. 1. Furnish and install all necessary conduit and wire, fittings, apparatus, etc., from the

service locations to each and every outlet as herein detailed, or shown on the Drawings. The entire system shall be left ready for operation.

2. The interior distribution system, in general, shall consist of 3-Phase, 4-Wire mains at 120/208 Volts, for mains and feeders of each distribution system respectively. The load on all feeders shall be balanced as nearly as possible on the three phases.

3. Pull and Splice Boxes a. Pull and splice boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized steel, or

aluminum, reinforced, where required, and with removable covers fastened with brass machine screws. Where size of box is not indicated, it shall be of sufficient size to pull, rack and splice the conductors to be contained therein. Box dimensions shall conform to requirements of NEC (as approved for use in N.Y.C.)

b. Pull and/or splice boxes shall be accessible and located where indicated on the Drawings or required to facilitate pulling of conductors or in raceway runs that have more than four (4) 90-degree turns.

c. Boxes shall have a prime coat of zinc chromate paint and a finish coat of gray enamel. Surfaces to be field painted shall be finished in flat gray.

4. Distribution of Feeders and Branch Circuits

Page 345: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems Page 3 of 5

a. Branch circuits shall be concentrated at the panelboards indicated and the circuits must be so connected that the load on each side of the system will balance within ten percent with all lamps operating.

b. The sizes of all cables and wires and the minimum size of conduit in which they shall be pulled shall in all cases conform to NEC as a minimum requirement.

c. The general arrangement of feeders and mains is shown on the Light and Power Riser Diagrams and associated panel Schedules on the Drawings.

d. The Contractor, in providing this installation, shall balance all loads as evenly as possible on all phases at each panel, if necessary, he shall reconnect branch circuits as required to provide equal phase balance. As-built drawings and panel schedules shall reflect circuiting as actually connected to each panel.

5. Cable Support Boxes a. Cable support boxes shall be installed at locations and of dimensions as

required by the NEC. These boxes shall be built of steel, or aluminum, with removable cover secured by brass machine screws and shall be stiffened with heavy angle irons. Cable supports shall be OZ type "S". Boxes must in all ways be satisfactory to the Architect and subject to his approval. Provide ground lug in box, secured by welding or brazing. Submit shop drawings for approval.

6. Painting a. Panel boxes, support boxes and pull boxes not hot dip galvanized shall be

given two shop coats of gray enamel both inside and out. Similarly, concealed iron work shall be given two coats of asphaltum paint. All finish painting of exposed work will be done under another Section of the Specifications.

E. For Motor Power Wiring 1. Run all power feeds and connections from power panels to all motor starters or

control panel locations. Where shown on Drawings connect the motor starting devices for motors, supplying and installing all necessary connections between starters and control devices and motors, in conduit, and leave motors ready to start. The power supply leads to the motors from the starters or control panels shall be of the same size and number of the other leads required for the proper operation of each motor.

2. Examine motors for presence of moisture prior to installation. Install, properly align and check rotation of motors that are not part of a completely assembled unit. Lubricate all motors according to the manufacturer's instructions prior to being placed into service.

3. Check motor nameplates for full-load current rating and allowable temperature rise to determine overload heater elements. Install correct heater element in the corresponding starter.

4. Furnish motor safety disconnect switches for all motors, except where such switches are specified to be furnished under other Sections, or are included in the equipment control panel. Install all motor safety disconnect switches furnished under this Section or Section 15000 of the Specification. Provide (6) wires from starters to two speed, three-phase motors. Switches shall be as specified elsewhere in these

Page 346: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems Page 4 of 5

Specifications. Install manually-operated devices, such as push-buttons and manual starters to permit convenient operation and be readily accessible.

5. Under no circumstances install rigid conduit terminated in or fastened to motor frame or base, and connecting conduits shall not be used to support starters or control enclosures. Install flexible conduit, Anaconda "Sealtite", at all motor connections to prevent transmission of noise or vibration. Length and radius of flexible conduit shall be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables without damaging the conductor or its insulation. Allow sufficient slack for movement of the motor over the entire slide rail length.

6. The starters will be furnished to the site under Section 15000 and shall be received and erected under this Section. Where indicated on plan, starters shall be individually or group mounted, plumb and level, on free-standing angle iron frames, supplied under this Section. Frame shall be set as close to the motors as possible. Where indicated mounted on walls or columns, this Contractor shall install flat or angle iron supports for the starters.

7. Provide manual motor starters for all fractional horsepower motors as shown on the Drawings, or otherwise required.

8. Electrical contractor shall provide motor suppliers with the minimum size of motor terminal blocks required for the wiring of the motors.

F. For Control and Alarm Wiring 1. Make connections to the following as specified hereinafter, and indicated on the

Drawings. a. Connection of 120V supply to motorized dampers furnished under other

Sections of the Specifications. b. Shutdown wiring for HVAC systems as shown on Drawings. c. Heating and air conditioning temperature control and data gathering panels

with alarms, pilots, etc., will be furnished and installed under Section 15000 of the Specifications. 120 Volt supply to control panels shall be furnished under this Section of the Specifications.

2. All control conductors shall be copper, minimum #14 AWG type THN, 600 volt insulated, installed in conduit. All conductors shall be tagged with brass or aluminum tags, permanently attached, giving the system designation and terminal number, or other such designation as approved.

3. Control wiring shall be based on schematic control diagrams shown on Drawings and/or on the description of control requirements in other Division of these Specifications describing the Mechanical Work, or on control diagrams submitted by Equipment Manufacturers.

4. Actual wiring between equipment and devices shall be done from point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the terminal connections on each piece of equipment. Obtain the individual equipment wiring diagrams from the Contractor who supplies the mechanical systems and equipment to be wired, and prepare neat point-to-point diagrams showing the actual wire and conduit and interconnections between the various equipment and control devices. After installation, correct these diagrams to show the "As-Installed" conditions for the Record.

Page 347: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems Page 5 of 5

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of power, control and alarm wiring, and after associated systems have been energized, test power, control and alarm wiring to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Field correct or replace defective wiring, and retest.

END OF SECTION 26 05 24

Page 348: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 349: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding Page 1 of 3

GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 05 26

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all grounding in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. "Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the type of equipment required for the application, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Refer to Approved Manufacturers in this Section.

B. Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer and comply with applicable publications of NFPA and UL.

C. Grounding shall comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for construction and installation.

D. For patient care area electrical power systems, grounding shall conform to Article 517 of the NEC.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's catalog cuts of ground wire.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

Page 350: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding Page 2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING

A. Ground clamps shall be bronze, solderless type with bronze screws suitable for receiving required or specified conductors.

B. Grounding conductors shall be UL and NEC approved types, copper, with insulation color identified green, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, or specified.

C. Ground bushings shall be hot-dipped galvanized fitting with a molded phenolic fitting and shall have a tin-plated copper lay-in-lug 150C insulation on phenolic fitting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine locations where grounding is to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The complete electrical installation shall be permanently and effectively grounded ahead (street side) of the cold water meter in accordance with all code requirements, whether or not such connections are specifically shown or specified. Measured resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms, maximum.

B. Parts of the electrical installation to be grounded shall include, but not be limited to, the following: underground distribution, outdoor substation service equipment, electric service system neutral, raceway system for normal and emergency light and power distribution systems, switchgear housings, cabinets, housings and neutrals of transformers, motor frames, housings of ALL communications, alarm, and control panels and associated devices and conduits, lighting fixtures, lightning protection system, busway enclosures, motor control centers, individual starters, convenience power receptacles, wall lighting switches, and other non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. The interconnecting of the service ground, system neutral, and equipment ground conductors shall be made within the service equipment assembly.

C. All copper bars for grounding shall be medium hard drawn. After installation, the copper bar shall be painted with one coat of an approved lacquer.

D. Ground conductors shall be of sizes and material in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Cable for grounding connections shall be bare in accordance with the latest revisions of ASTM Designations B3 and B8. All open bare grounding cable

Page 351: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding Page 3 of 3

shall be secured in place with cast one hole malleable clamps and clamp backs, and 3 inch bolts.

E. Ground wires shall be continuous without splices. There shall be no soldered joints in any ground connection. Connectors, clamps, etc. shall be solderless type.

F. Unless otherwise shown or required, conduit shall provide grounding for motors and electrical equipment.

G. Ground interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductors connected to metallic raceway at each end.

H. Bond all conductive piping systems in the buildings to the electrical system ground. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the water pipe or service equipment ground bay.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of grounding system, test system for continuity and resistance to demonstrate compliance with requirements and submit certification to Architect that material and installation has been properly installed.

B. Inspect all connections prior to concealing same.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26

Page 352: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 353: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Page 1 of 5

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 29

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

Page 354: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Page 2 of 5

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.

1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

Page 355: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Page 3 of 5

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

Page 356: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Page 4 of 5

2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps

using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

Page 357: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Page 5 of 5

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided

with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.04 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

(0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099000 "Painting and Finishing" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29

Page 358: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 359: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 1 of 10

RACEWAYS AND INSTALLATION COMPONENTS SECTION 26 05 33

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The requirements of this section apply to raceway work required for the protection of electrical conductors. Raceways are required for all wiring unless otherwise specified.

B. The work includes the furnishing and installation of completely coordinated, effectively grounded raceway systems complete with boxes, fittings, flexible connections to vibrating equipment and other accessories, as required. Conduit or tubing sizes referred to in the Specifications and on the Drawings are nominal trade sizes.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers - Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of raceways and accessories of the types required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Refer to PART 2 of this section for "Approved Manufacturers".

B. Raceways and installation components shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with applicable sections of National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards.

C. All outdoor installations shall be weatherproof.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Submit a list of proposed manufacturers for all raceways and components.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

Page 360: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 2 of 10

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Raceways 1. Metallic:

a. Wheatland Tube Co. b. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. c. Triangle PWC, Inc.

2. Wireways: a. Panduit Corp. b. Square "D" Company c. Hoffman Engineering Co.

B. Raceway Fittings 1. O.Z. Electrical Mfg. Co., Inc. 2. Appleton Electric Co. 3. Crouse-Hinds Co. 4. Thomas and Betts Co.

C. Boxes - Steel 1. O.Z./Gedney 2. Appleton 3. Raco Inc. 4. Russell & Stoll Co. 5. Steel City Electric Co.

D. Boxes - Cast Iron 1. O.Z./Gedney 2. Appleton 3. Crouse-Hinds Co.

2.02 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Raceways: 1. All conduit shall be : inch minimum. 2. Rigid steel conduit: Shall be full weight steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized inside and

outside, threaded. 3. Intermediate metal conduit: Shall be intermediate steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized,

threaded. 4. Electric metallic tubing (EMT) shall be steel thin wall pipe, galvanized, threadless. 5. Flexible steel conduit (Greenfield): Shall be continuous single strip, galvanized. 6. Liquid-tight, flexible steel conduit: Shall be zinc coated and consist of flexible

galvanized steel tubing over which is extruded a liquid-tight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

7. Wiring troughs: Refer to Section 26 27 26, 2.2 B. 8. Surface metal raceways: Shall consist of base and snap-on type cover sections, of

nominal material thickness .040" minimum. Shall be steel, baked enamel finish, and shall be provided with all the required fittings. Sizes as noted on the Drawings.

Page 361: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 3 of 10

B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Thread compounds shall be UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance

ground continuity through conduit. 2. Metallic conduit fittings shall be corrosion resistant. 3. Bushings shall be of the metallic insulated type. 4. For weatherproof and dustight installations provide liquid-tight fittings with sealing

rings and insulated throat. 5. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall be standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows. b. Sealing fittings shall be of the threaded cast iron type. Sealing fittings used to

prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. In concealed work, each fitting shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same finish as that of other electrical plates in the room.

6. Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a. Couplings and connectors shall be steel body-malleable iron nut, "concrete

tight". They shall be compression type, afford raintight integrity, and provide positive ground. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

7. Flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) fittings: a. Shall be pressure clamp type with insulated throat and UL approved for ground

continuity. 8. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:

a. Shall be of a type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats. Shall be UL approved for ground continuity.

2.03 INSTALLATION COMPONENTS

A. Sleeves: 1. Provide and assume responsibility for locating and maintaining in proper position all

sleeves required for the work. See Section 01 31 46 - General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work for sleeves specification.

2. For raceways through sleeves, provide seals of compression neoprene or O.Z. Type WSC compound on both sides.

3. For cables in raceways through sleeves, provide seals similar to O.Z. Type WSC compound or Type C series terminators.

4. Through floors, exterior masonry walls and roof sleeves shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. For other areas, sleeves shall be 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel.

B. Fire sealants: 1. Openings through floors and walls in which cables, conduits, or pipe pass shall be

sealed by U.L. classified smoke and fire stop fittings, and have an hourly rating equal to the fire rating of the floor or wall. Fittings shall be similar to O.Z. Gedney Type "CFS" or CAFS".

2. Penetrations through fire-rated floors in which wiring for floor service outlets in routed shall be sealed by U.L. classified smoke and fire-stop fittings, and shall have an hourly rating equal to the floor rating. Fittings shall be similar to O.Z. Gedney Type "PTFS".

Page 362: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 4 of 10

2.04 SUPPORTS

A. Conduit Supports: 1. All parts and hardware shall be zinc-coated or have equivalent corrosion protection. 2. Individual conduit hangers, shall be designed for the purpose, have pre-assembled

closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving hanger rod. 3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers shall be not less than 12" by 12", 12 gauge steel,

cold formed, lipped channels. Hanger rods shall be not less than d" diameter steel. 4. Solid masonry and concrete anchors shall be a type approved for the purpose.

B. Fasteners: 1. Furnish all fasteners and hardware compatible with the materials and methods

required for attachment of supporting devices. a. Slotted-Type Concrete Inserts: Galvanized pressured steel plate complying

with ASTM A 283; box-typed welded construction with slot designed to receive steel nut and with knockout cover; hot-dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 386.

b. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields complying with Federal Specification FF-S-325, as follows: 1) Furnish lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts 3" and

smaller; head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 1.

2) Furnish lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts larger than 3" in size; head-out embedded nut type, multiple unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 2.

3) Furnish bolt anchor expansion shields for lag bolts, zinc alloy, long-shield anchors class, Group II, Type 1, Class 1.

4) Furnish bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts, closed-end bottom bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class I.

c. Toggle Bolts: 1) Tumble-wing type, complying with Federal Specification FF-B-588,

type, class and style as required. d. Nuts, Bolts, Screws, Washers:

1) General: Furnish zinc-coated fasteners, with galvanized complying with ASTM A 153 for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Furnish fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the particular installation.

2) Standard Nuts and Bolts: Regular hexagon head type, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A.

3) Lag Bolts: Square head type, complying with Federal Specification FF-B-561.

4) Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-S-92.

5) Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-W-92.

6) Plain Washers: Round, general assembly grade carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-W-92.

Page 363: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 5 of 10

7) Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification FF-W-84.

C. "C" Beam Clamps: 1. For 1" Conduit Maximum: Caddy Fastener Div./Erico Products Inc. BC-8P and

BC-8PSM Series, HIT Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. CH Series. 2. For 3" Conduit Maximum: Gedney Electric Co. IS-500 Series bean clamp with

H50WB Series hangers; Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div. 500 Series hanger; Appleton Electric Co. BH-500 Series beam clamp with H50W/B Series hanger.

3. For 4" Conduit Maximum: Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div. E-231 beam clamp and E-234 anchor clip and C-149 Series lay-in hanger; Unistrut Corp. P2676 beam clamp and P-1659 Series anchor clip with J1-205 Series lay-in hanger.

4. For Threaded Rods (100 lbs. load max.): Caddy Fastner Div./ Erico Products Inc. Cat. No. BC-4A; HIT Spring Steel Fasteners Inc. master clamp MC.

5. For Threaded Rods (200 lbs. load max.): Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp. 500 Series; Gedney Electric Co. IS-500 Series; Appleton Electric Co. BH-500 Series.

6. For Threaded Rods (300 lbs. load max.): Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp. E-231 beam clamp and E-234 anchor clip; Unistrut Corp. P2676 beam clamp and P-1659A Series anchor clip.

D. Pipe Straps: 1. Two hole steel conduit straps with Galv-Krom finish, Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland

Ross Corp. C-144 or C-280 Series.

E. Pipe Clamps: 1. One hole malleable iron type clamps, Gedney Electric Co., 14-50 Series; Kindorf

Elec. Prod. Div./ Midland Ross Corp. HS-400 Series.

F. Deck Clamps: 1. Caddy Fasteners Div./Erico Products Inc. DH-4-T1 Series. HIT Spring Steel

Fasteners, Inc. RD Series.

G. Fixture Stud and Strap: 1. Steel Electrical Products Div. FE-431; Gedney Electric Co. SL-134.

H. Channel Support System and Accessories: 1. Furnish 12 gauge galvanized steel channel and accessories as manufactured by:

a. Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp.; B-9000 (12" x 12"), B-901 (12" x 1f"), B-902 (12" x 3").

b. Unistrut Corp.; P-3000 (1d" x 1e"), P-5500 (1e" x 27/16"), P-5500 (1e" x 33").

c. B-Line Division - The Brinkley Co.; B-22 (1e" x 1e"), B-12 (1e" x 27/16"), B-11 (1e" x 33").

d. Versabar Corp.; VA-1 (1e" x 1e"), VA-3 (1e" x 22").

I. Support Fittings for Industrial Fluorescent Fixtures on Exposed Conduit System: 1. Ball Hanger: Crouse-Hinds Co. ALC, Appleton Electric Co. ALL Series.

Page 364: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 6 of 10

2. Flexible Fixture Hanger: Crouse-Hinds Co. UNJ115, Appleton Electric Co. UNJ-50 or UNJ-75, Oz Gedney ECHF-50 or ECHF-75.

3. Flexible (Hook Type) Fixture Hanger: Crouse-Hinds Co. UNH-1, Appleton Electric Co. FHHF.

4. Eyelet: Steel City Electrical Products Div. H-263, Unistrut Corp. M2250. 5. Eyelet with Stud: Steel City Electrical Products Div. H262, Unistrut M2250. 6. Conduit Hook: Crouse-Hinds Co. UNH-13, Appleton Electric Co. FHSN.

2.05 BOXES

A. Outlet boxes: 1. Outlet boxes for concealed work shall be galvanized steel, 4 in. square or octagonal,

or as required by construction, devices or wiring, and shall conform to UL's "Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings." Outlet boxes shall be provided with a galvanized steel cover or extension ring depth as required. As a minimum, boxes shall be of the following depths and as described for specific applications hereinafter:

Above ceiling 12" deep

In ceiling or slab 3" deep.

In wall for fixture 2:" deep.

In wall for receptacles and switches with raised covers and fixtures studs where required. Through-the-wall type are not permitted

12" deep.

Receiving 13" conduit 22" deep min.

2. Ceiling fixture outlet boxes, except as noted, shall be 4" octagonal and 1e" deep and with d" fixture stud. Where cast in slab, boxes shall be open back concrete type.

3. Wall bracket outlets shall be 4" square and 1e" deep with cover having 2f" round openings and except for lampholders shall be furnished with fixture stud.

4. All outlet boxes for concealed convenience receptacles or local switches shall be 4" square and 1e" deep with regular deep switch extension cover, except where installed on columns they shall be of sufficient depth so that conduits may be installed into these boxes in back of fireproofing. Outlet boxes for gang receptacles and switches shall suit space conditions.

5. Outlet boxes for exposed work shall be galvanized cast iron or aluminum with threaded hubs. Except as otherwise required by construction, devices or wiring, the outlet boxes shall be 4 in. round x 2 in. deep for mounting on ceilings and 4 in. square x 2 in. deep for mounting on walls.

6. Boxes shall be of the cast type for switches and receptacles when installed on the exterior of the project. Such boxes shall be aluminum or malleable iron of the threaded hub type, with covers without projecting edges or corners and with openings suitable for the devices to be contained therein. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or anodized and shall be gasketed.

7. Outlet boxes located outdoors and damp locations shall be weatherproof. 8. Outlet boxes without fixture or device, shall have blank cover. 9. Offset back-to-back outlets, shall have minimum 6 in. separation between them. 10. Extension rings shall be provided as required to suit various conditions.

Page 365: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 7 of 10

11. Grounding screw and cable wiring connector shall be provided as required by wiring method.

12. Boxes for use with surface mounted raceways shall be of the same construction and manufacture as the raceway.

13. Except where special outlets are required, wall outlets for signaling systems shall be 4" square with single gang raised cover and bushed plate.

14. Junction outlets shall be the same as bracket outlets but without stud, furnished with covers to suit each condition and as directed. Where number of conductors exceed capacity of standard box, provide special size box.

B. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Junction and pull boxes shall be made of galvanized sheet steel and with screw-on

covers, except as noted, and will include insulated supports for cables. 2. Provide junction and/or pull boxes as noted or as required. all junction and pull

boxes shall be accessible. 3. Junction and pull boxes located outdoors and in damp locations shall be galvanized

cast iron with threaded hubs and gaskets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine locations where raceways and installation components are to be installed, determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Raceways: 1. Install raceways in accordance with applicable requirements of NEC and National

Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

2. The routing and location of conduit runs are generally not dimensional on the drawings but shall be determined in the field to suit the locations of equipment, to conform to structural features and to avoid interferences. Where exposed conduits are dimensional on drawings, they shall be installed to a tolerance of 2". Coordinate with equipment configuration and exact location prior to connection.

3. Support by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, or wall brackets, structural steel angles or channels. Secure raceways to supports with pipe straps or U-bolts. Spacing of support shall be as per NEC. Provide U-bolts at each floor level for riser raceways and connect to acceptable supports.

4. Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion shields or inserts on concrete and brick, machine screws on metal, wood screws on wood.

5. Allow a 6 in. minimum separation between raceways and steam and hot water pipes. Provide approved thermal insulation for electric lines where this separation cannot be maintained.

Page 366: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 8 of 10

6. Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and from underside of boilers. Also, install raceway so that they will not obstruct headroom, doorways, or walkways.

7. For outlets located in hung ceilings, run raceways in hung ceilings and connect to main ceiling support channels.

8. Run raceways concealed, except as noted. Exposed raceways shall be run parallel with or at right angles to walls. In walls, run raceways vertically only.

9. Mechanically join all metal raceways, enclosures and junction boxes to form a continuous electrical conductor. Connect all electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets so as to provide effective electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. Maintain grounding continuity of interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductor, sized in accordance with the NEC.

10. Provide long radius bends for empty raceway system where required to satisfy the system cabling requirements.

11. Install complete conduit runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways so that required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain to raceway or cable. Where raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable code.

12. Do not cross pipe shafts or ventilation duct openings. Route raceway to avoid present or future openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so indicated on the drawings.

13. Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction. 14. For empty raceways over 10 ft. long, provide fish or pull wire. Pull wire shall consist

of nylon or polypropylene cord. 15. Damaged or deformed raceway shall be removed and replaced. 16. Branch circuit conduits shall not be supported by lighting fixtures, piping, or air

conditioning ducts. 17. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to

avoid damaging them. 18. Permitted Uses:

a. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1) RGS shall be used, in wet or damp locations, for exposed runs on the

exterior of the building, in mechanical equipment spaces, hazardous locations, for fire alarm, smoke detection, sprinkler alarm systems, where subject to physical damage, and as noted.

b. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC): 1) IMC may be used in place of RGS in dry locations only.

c. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1) EMT shall be used for branch circuit wiring only, installed in dry

locations (hung ceilings, hollow block walls and furred spaces). 2) EMT shall be used for feeders and subfeeders installed in dry

locations, such as hung ceilings, riser shafts, where rising through electric closets and furred spaces.

3) EMT shall be used for low voltage system wiring, (communications, signaling, alarm, remote controls, etc.) installed in dry locations (hung ceilings, hollow block walls, riser shafts, and furred spaces).

4) EMT shall be used for Fire Alarm Systems d. Flexible steel conduit:

1) Flexible steel conduit "Greenfield", shall be used for the following applications: for short connections where rigid conduit or tubing is

Page 367: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 9 of 10

impracticable, from outlet box to recessed lighting fixture with minimum length of 4 ft. and a maximum length of 6 ft., and for final connections to vibrating equipment other than motors and transformers in dry locations only.

2) For final connections to motor terminal boxes, transformers and other vibrating equipment, the flexible steel conduit shall have polyvinyl sheathing "Sealtite" and a ground conductor. The minimum length of the flexible conduit shall be 18 in. with slack. Connect the ground conductor to the enclosure or raceway at each end.

19. Provide expansion-deflection fittings with bonding jumper at expansion joints and on length of runs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

20. For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations: a. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapors, where conduits

pass from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces, or similar areas.

B. Sleeves: 1. Sleeves shall be provided in accordance with the following guidelines:

a. Set required sleeves and inserts in place during progress of construction to avoid cutting of completed work.

b. Provide sleeves for raceway passing through floors and foundations. Determine exact location of sleeves in field to avoid interference with structural members or equipment of other trades.

C. Fire-Stops: 1. Where wiring, conduits, cable trays, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass

through fire partitions, fire walls, or floors, install an approved fire-stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Firestop material (Heat activated putty and a high temperature fiber material) shall be packed tight and shall completely fill clearances between raceways and openings. It shall be applied concurrently with the installation of the wiring. The fire stop fittings shall have a U.L. classified hourly rating equal to the fire rating of the floor or wall.

2. Floor, exterior wall, and roof seals shall also be made watertight. Mineral wood, oakum, grout or duct seal stuffed into or around penetrations shall not be used.

D. Outlet Boxes: 1. Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Boxes shall be secured to the

building structure by adjustable strap irons. 2. In locating outlets, allow for overhead pipes, ducts, and variations in arrangement,

thickness in finish, window trim and other architectural construction details. Correct any inaccuracy resulting from failure to do so without any additional expense to the Owner.

3. Close all unused openings in outlet boxes with knockout closers manufactured for this purpose. Provide blank plates on outlet boxes in which no device is installed or device installed does not provide a suitable cover.

4. Securely fasten exposed outlet boxes by attaching to permanent inserts or lead anchors with machine screws. Adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent movement.

Page 368: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components Page 10 of 10

E. Panelboard, Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Panelboard, junction and pull boxes shall be located clear of other trades equipment,

accessible, supported from the building structure, and independent of the conduits. 2. Conceal junction and pull boxes in finished spaces. 3. Coordinate size of motor terminal boxes with motor branch circuit conduit and wiring.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33

Page 369: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling Page 1 of 4

SLEEVES & SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS & CABLING SECTION 26 05 44

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls

and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Firestopping/Smoke Seals" for penetration firestopping installed

in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating

that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc

coated, plain ends.

Page 370: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling Page 2 of 4

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.03 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

Page 371: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling Page 3 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular

sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Page 372: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling Page 4 of 4

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION 26 05 44

Page 373: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 1 of 7

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 53

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

Page 374: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 2 of 7

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.02 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

Page 375: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 3 of 7

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Write-on, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

C. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer. 2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent,

waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

2.05 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

2.06 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

Page 376: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 4 of 7

2.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.08 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi

(82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

Page 377: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 5 of 7

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use

colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than

No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.

Page 378: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 6 of 7

G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,

terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with

system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,

and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated.

J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

L. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

Page 379: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Page 7 of 7

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Variable-speed controllers. i. Push-button stations. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m. Battery racks. n. Power-generating units. o. Monitoring and control equipment. p. UPS equipment.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53

Page 380: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 381: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 1 of 10

PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 24 16

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Electronic-grade panelboards.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

Page 382: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 2 of 10

B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device that allows adjustments.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)

Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size

and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed

for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-

site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Page 383: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 3 of 10

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,

wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding [minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C)]

[23 deg F (minus 5 deg C)] to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction

Manager's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

Page 384: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 4 of 10

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. c. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,

match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard

front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure;

integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment

grounding conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

Page 385: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 5 of 10

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.03 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings of Easton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Fused switch.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

Page 386: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 6 of 10

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.05 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials.

Page 387: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 7 of 10

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

f. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 262813 "Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number

of poles. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: [One] [Two] normally open and normally closed contact(s)

that operate with switch handle operation.

2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

Page 388: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 8 of 10

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads[ after balancing panelboard loads]; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

Page 389: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 9 of 10

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting

supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

Page 390: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards Page 10 of 10

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 26 24 16

Page 391: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices and Installation Components Page 1 of 4

WIRING DEVICES AND INSTALLATION COMPONENTS SECTION 26 27 26

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 34 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply. 1. Generally, the location of devices and outlet boxes in finished rooms or spaces shall

be where indicated. 2. Unless otherwise noted, the following dimensions from finish floor to center of outlet

shall be established. a. Receptacle outlets in mechanical

spaces 3'-6"

b. Wall switch outlet 3'-6" c. Motor controllers 5'-0" d. Safety and disconnect switches 5'-0" e. Panelboards (lighting and power) 6'-6" above finished floor to top

D. In centering outlets allow for overhead pipes, ducts, etc., and for variation in thickness of fireproofing and plastering. Allowances shall also be made for window trims, paneling, counters, casework, etc. Any inaccuracies resulting from failure to comply with the above must be corrected without additional expense to the Owner.

E. Receptacles listed in this Section of the Specification shall be of the type indicated, or approved equal to the Manufacturers listed. Where furnished under this Section of the Specification, provide matching plugs for each receptacle.

F. Where indicated, switch and receptacle shall be combined.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and made ready for operation by the Owner, all wiring devices in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. "Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices and installation components, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide wiring devices and installation components produced by a manufacturer listed as an Approved Manufacturer in this Section.

Page 392: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices and Installation Components Page 2 of 4

C. Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include manual motor starters, multi-outlet systems, wireways, floor boxes, receptacles and local wall switches.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Wiring Devices 1. Leviton 2. Harvey Hubbell Incorporated 3. Bryant Electric Co.

B. Miscellaneous Installation Components 1. Refer to Respective Articles.

2.02 WIRING DEVICES

A. Local Wall Switches: 1. Switches shall be heavy duty, toggle, quiet type, fully enclosed in composition cases,

with grounding screw. 2. Switches shall be rated 20 amp, 120/277 volt, AC. 3. Switches shall be as indicated below, or approved equal:

a. Single Pole: Hubbell No. HBL 1221 Leviton 1221-2 4. Key switches of equivalent rating and grade to above switches shall be provided

where indicated on Drawings. 5. Where it is not possible to set the switch box flush with the wall, furnish raised edge

plates. 6. Where more than one switch is being installed, provide multiple gang switch plates

for number of switches as indicated. 7. Gang switch plates for five or more switches (or receptacles) shall be engraved with

titles as directed by Architect.

B. Receptacles: 1. Receptacles shall be the grounding type, (except as otherwise noted) composition

base, meeting NEMA standards, publication WD-1-1971. 2. Where it is not possible to set the outlet box flush into the wall, furnish raised edge

plates. Convenience receptacle shall be mounted with ground pole down. 3. Receptacles shall be as indicated below or approved equal:

Page 393: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices and Installation Components Page 3 of 4

a. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 Volts, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, U ground slot type. 1) 20 Amp. Hubbell No. 5362 Leviton 5362A (20 Amp circuits).

b. Single Receptacles: 20 Amp, 125 Volts, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, twist-lock type, Hubbell No. 2310, Leviton 23101.

c. Outdoor Receptacles: 20 Amps, 125 Volts, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, U ground slot type, duplex convenience receptacle, with weatherproof cover, Leviton 4926.

d. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles, 20 Amp.: Hubbell No. GO-5362.

C. Pilot lights shall be General Electric #4217, Bryant #427 or approved equal receptacle, with bull's eye set in same plate as switch.

D. Switch, Receptacle, and Signaling Outlet Plates: 1. Plates shall be stainless steel, chrome finish Type 302, .035" thick, or beveled metal

stainless steel Type 302, or smooth thermoplastic of (ivory) (white) (brown) color finish, or smooth metal .040" thick brass, or beveled metal .040" thick brushed brass.

2. Surface mounted wiring devices and blank outlet plates shall be cadmium plated. Interior outlet plates shall be pressed steel. Outlets exposed to weather or corrosive conditions shall be of the cast-metal type.

3. Plates for weatherproof receptacles shall consist of cast-aluminum gasketed plate with spring-loaded lift covers providing access to the outlet. Lift cover to correspond to number of outlets to be gasketed. Plates for weatherproof switches shall consist of a cast plate with flexible bubble for activating a push type switch. Plates shall be for corrosion-resistant devices, as manufactured by Hubbell, Inc., or approved equal.

2.03 INSTALLATION COMPONENTS

A. Wiring Troughs: 1. Wiring troughs shall be 4" x 4" or 6" x 6", brake-formed of code gauge (No. 16 gauge

minimum) steel, furnished in standard 10-foot sections with knockouts, as required. Wiring troughs shall be of the screw-on cover type and shall have a high grade enamel finish baked on a chemically-cleaned and zinc-phosphatized surface providing maximum resistance to corrosion. Wiring troughs for use in radiology rooms shall be of type and configuration shown on Drawings.

2. Wiring troughs shall be furnished with all the required components, such as square junction boxes, 90-degree elbows, T-shaped pull boxes, crossover pull boxes, box-connecting couplings, fittings and screw-on cover plates. Lengths of individual sections shall be provided in accordance with installation requirements.

B. Manual Motor Starters: 1. Manual motor starters shall be horsepower rated, and voltage rated for the motor

load. 2. The operating mechanism shall be a snap switch with one pole per phase. 3. Overload protection shall be provided with one thermal overload relay with

replaceable tripping element for each pole, manually reset from the operating handle. The heater for each tripping element shall be coordinated with the nameplate rating of the motor.

Page 394: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices and Installation Components Page 4 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where wiring devices and installation components are to be installed, determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring devices and installation components where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices and installation components.

C. Installation shall comply with the requirements of NEC and NECA, "Standard of Installation".

D. Install devices only after wiring is completed.

E. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical outlet boxes which are clean, free from debris, excess building materials, etc.

F. At time of completion, replace items which have been damaged, including those burned and scorched by faulty plugs.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of installation of wiring devices and installation components, and after connection to power source, test wiring devices and installation components to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

B. Test wiring devices and installation components to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26

Page 395: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 28 13 – 600 Volt Fuses Page 1 of 3

600 VOLT FUSES SECTION 26 28 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, the fuses as shown in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. "Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fuses whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide fuses produced by a manufacturer listed as an Approved Manufacturer in this Section.

C. Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work. Shop drawings shall include cuts and time current curves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. 600 Volt Fuses 1. Bussmann

Page 396: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 28 13 – 600 Volt Fuses Page 2 of 3

2. Cefco 3. Shawmut

2.02 600 VOLT FUSES

A. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is to be energized. All fuses shall have a 200,000 ampere RMS symmetrical interrupting rating unless specified otherwise. Fuse symbols in parentheses are those of Bussmann.

B. Fuses: 601 to 6000 Amperes shall be UL Class L (KRP-C), with time-delay characteristics of 10 seconds or more, at 500% of current rating.

C. Fuses: Up to 600 Amperes shall be UL Class "J",(JKS fast acting), for non-inductive loads and UL Class "J" (LPJ time delay) for inductive loads.

D. Spare Fuses: 1. A complete set of spare fuses shall be purchased at the same time the initial fuses

are purchased. Spare fuses shall consist of a standard carton for 0 to 60 amperes rating. For above 60 amperes rating provide 10% of each type and rating, or a set of three, whichever is greater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where fuses are to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses where shown or required, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B. Installation shall comply with the requirements of NEC and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation".

C. Contractor shall install Class R fuse rejection kits on all heavy duty safety switches not already fitted for Class R fuses.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of installation of fuses, test and inspect system to ensure compliance with requirements.

Page 397: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 28 13 – 600 Volt Fuses Page 3 of 3

B. Final tests and inspections shall be made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning, tightening and review of all electrical connections and inspection of all grounding conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 28 13

Page 398: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 399: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 28 16 – Safety and Disconnect Switches Page 1 of 3

SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 26 28 16

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all safety and disconnect switches (fused and unfused) in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. "Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the type of equipment required for the application, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Safety and disconnect switches shall comply with applicable standards of NEMA and shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Switches shall be approved for service where required, (and approved for use in New York City in accordance with NYCEC).

C. Comply with NEC (NFPA 70) with New York City amendments for construction and installation of safety and disconnect switches.

D. Provide safety and disconnect switches produced by a manufacturer listed as an Approved Manufacturer in this Section.

E. Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the Manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include switch dimensions, ratings and NEMA enclosure types.

Page 400: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 28 16 – Safety and Disconnect Switches Page 2 of 3

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Safety and Disconnect Switches 1. Square D 2. Westinghouse 3. General Electric

2.02 SWITCH INTERIOR

A. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors, where necessary to permit easy access to line-side lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for aluminum and/or copper cables and front removable. All current carrying parts shall be plated. 30A thru 100A switches shall have provisions for field installed fuse pullers. Switches shall include solid neutral where required.

2.03 SWITCH MECHANISM

A. Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Switches shall have a defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. Handle position shall indicate if switch is ON or OFF. Handle shall have provision for padlock.

2.04 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 enclosure except as otherwise noted or required with multiple knockouts on all sides and back, hinged door, and cover interlock which prevents door from opening when switch is in ON position. Enclosure shall have provisions for positive padlocking in ON and OFF positions.

B. For exterior installations, the enclosures shall be NEMA 3R.

C. All enclosures shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions of the area.

2.05 RATINGS

A. Switches shall be rated for voltage, poles, amperes, and horsepower, as required or shown on Drawings. All switches shall be rated for maximum available fault current as required and/or as noted.

Page 401: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 28 16 – Safety and Disconnect Switches Page 3 of 3

2.06 FUSES

A. Fused safety and disconnect switches shall be provided with fuses of class, type, and rating as required or shown on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine locations where safety and disconnect switches are to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety and disconnect switches as required by all applicable codes and as shown on Drawings. Install safety and disconnect switches in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, recognized industry practices, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation".

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of safety and disconnect switches with other equipment in the area.

C. Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work as necessary for proper interface.

D. Install disconnect switches within sight of motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide nameplate on switch, indicating equipment served.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of installation of safety and disconnect switches, test and inspect system to ensure compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

B. Close all switches to check for proper energization of all loads.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16

Page 402: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 403: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 1 of 7

INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 26 51 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. 5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent

lamps.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy-efficiency data.

Page 404: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 2 of 7

5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data

shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following: 1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be

attached. 3. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Speakers. b. Sprinklers. c. Smoke and fire detectors. d. Occupancy sensors.

4. Perimeter moldings.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

Page 405: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 3 of 7

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers'

codes.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish

at least one of each type.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

Page 406: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 4 of 7

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least [0.125 inch (3.175 mm)] <Insert dimension>

minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin,

quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

Page 407: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 5 of 7

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

G. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

2.03 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated

lamp life. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-

contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit

voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.04 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

Page 408: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 6 of 7

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

D. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit

swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

Page 409: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting Page 7 of 7

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.04 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.

END OF SECTION 26 51 00

Page 410: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 411: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 1 of 13

CONDUCTORS & CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY SECTION 28 05 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Cable and Hardware specifications provided for reference only. Coordinate with FIT for exact cable manufacturer and type.

B. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. 62.5/125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber cabling. 3. Coaxial cabling. 4. Low-voltage control cabling. 5. Control-circuit conductors. 6. Fire alarm wire and cable. 7. Identification products.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.

Page 412: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 2 of 13

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to

supervise on-site testing.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use

optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set. 2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to

verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are

not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

Page 413: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 3 of 13

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.02 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.03 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. CommScope, Inc. 6. Draka Cableteq USA. 7. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 8. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.04 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 4. Belden Inc.

Page 414: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 4 of 13

5. Dynacom Inc. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring. 7. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 8. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 9. Panduit Corp. 10. Siemon.

B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

2.05 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems. 6. CSI Technologies Inc. 7. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 8. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-A for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

5. Maximum Attenuation: Coordinate with Owner. 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-

C.

Page 415: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 5 of 13

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm).

2.06 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems. 6. CSI Technologies Inc. 7. Dynacom Inc. 8. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring. 9. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 10. Siemon. 11.

B. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75

dB. 2. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment

packages.

2.07 COAXIAL CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Coleman Cable, Inc. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA.

B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV. 1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent

aluminum braid. 4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.

Page 416: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 6 of 13

5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.

D. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR. 1. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor. 2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 3. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent

aluminum braid; covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip. 4. Color-coded PVC jacket.

E. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM. 1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE

insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum

braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations.

F. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV. 1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE

insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent

aluminum braid. 3. PVC jacket.

G. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene

propylene insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum

braid. 3. Copolymer jacket.

H. NFPA and UL Compliance: Coaxial cables shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows: 1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262. 3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666. 4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.

2.08 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions; AIM Electronics Brand. 2. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 3. Siemon.

Page 417: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 7 of 13

B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.09 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded

(19x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded

(19x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.10 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.11 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760,

Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

Page 418: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 8 of 13

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors,

Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.12 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Page 419: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 9 of 13

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.

3.02 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways. 1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (21 mm). Control and data transmission

wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without

exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in

writing by manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type

terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

Page 420: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 10 of 13

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of

termination to maintain cable geometry.

E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet

mounted.

F. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation: 1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X.

Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (915 mm).

G. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications

spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts,

or other potentially damaging items.

H. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating

unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127

mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches

(300 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches

(600 mm).

Page 421: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 11 of 13

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches

(64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches

(150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches

(300 mm). 4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and

electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches

(75 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150

mm). 5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or

HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). 6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches

(127 mm).

3.04 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm

system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring

associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. 2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70,

Types MI and CI, is not permitted. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in

the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

Page 422: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 12 of 13

E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

3.05 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with site specific requirements for connecting, terminating, and identifying fire alarm wires and cables.

3.07 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Firestops and Smoke Seals."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.08 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.09 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

Page 423: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Page 13 of 13

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL

certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-

568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-

568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one

direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

5. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System."

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 28 05 13

Page 424: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 425: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 1 of 26

FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 28 31 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.

D. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to best available standards at the scale required.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This project is an expansion of an existing Acme Fire Alarm system with supplementary Edwards/EST Model EST3 system expansion components. All new systems equipment and subpanels shall connect to the existing fire alarm RS485 network (a data connection). All new points shall also report to the existing FireWorks PC graphics computer. As part of this project, all programming of the existing system and/or graphics workstations shall be included as part of this contract.

B. Prior to installation of the new system the contractor is to study and record all pertinent information regarding the operation of the existing fans and location and state of existing fire smoke dampers during normal and alarm conditions, in order to preserve and maintain such operation under the new Fire Alarm system.

C. For building specific information contractors shall contact the base building fire alarm vendor listed as follows: 1. High Rise Fire and Security

144 21st Street Brooklyn, NY 11232 (718) 369-3434 Contact: Moises Ruiz - [email protected]

D. The system shall be intelligent device addressable, analog detecting, low voltage and modular, with digital communication techniques, in full compliance with all applicable codes and standards. Generic terms such as “sub system”, “the system”, “a system”, “the fire alarm system”, etc. shall be deemed to apply to the complete intelligent analog addressable fire alarm system, unless specifically noted elsewhere.

Page 426: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 2 of 26

E. The features and capacities described in this specification are a requirement for this project and shall be furnished by the successful Contractor. The system as described shall be installed, programmed, tested, and delivered to the Owner in fully operational condition. The system shall include all required hardware, software, raceways and interconnecting wiring to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether or not specifically itemized herein. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Connection to existing building system and provision of related remote data

gathering panels. 2. Addressable analog area smoke detectors. 3. Addressable analog duct smoke detectors. 4. Audible notification appliances - horns. 5. Visual notification appliances - strobes. 6. Air handling systems shutdown control. 7. Sprinkler supervisory switches and tamper switch supervision. 8. Battery standby. 9. ALL NYC Fire Alarm peripherals (listed as such but as required by the FDNY to

meet the 2008 NYC code), placards, riser diagram, necessary switches, LED’s, manual central office trip, Fuse Cutout, FDNY approved locks, with enclosed Purge switches shall be included in the system price. Data gathering panels shall be connected to a power riser with a fused disconnect. A common ground shall be included in the power riser.

F. Non-addressable alarm initiating, supervisory and status monitored devices shall be integrated into the fire alarm system, as applicable, via the addressable interface module: 1. Sprinkler water flow alarm (alarm initiating) 2. Sprinkler standpipe water flow (alarm initiating) 3. Sprinkler valve tamper switch (supervisory)

G. Audible / visual signaling devices and communicating devices to be controlled by the FACP and/or RSP transponder panels: 1. Hornes 2. Strobe Lights 3. Combination Horn-Strobe

H. Devices to be controlled by the FACP and/or RSP’s panel programmable relays, duct smoke detector programmable relays, remote system programmable addressable relays and/or intelligent addressable interface module relays: 1. Connections to the appropriate Central Monitoring Point or as directed by the

Owner for manual station alarm, sprinkler alarm, smoke alarm, interfaced suppression system alarm, supervisory and system trouble conditions.

2. Air handling fan systems alarm shut down operations. 3. Fire/smoke dampers operations. 4. Elevator controls for elevator recall.

Page 427: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 3 of 26

1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS / WORK AND EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall obtain all permits

necessary for installation of the work. All permit costs and inspections fees shall be included as part of the required work.

2. Local requirements shall be adhered to with regard to submitting specifications, wiring diagrams, shop drawings and plans. Responsibility for furnishing the quantities of copies on cloth and/or paper, as directed by such requirements, shall be included as part of the work of this Section.

3. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, the Contractor shall notify all authorities having jurisdiction.

4. The Contractor shall submit a letter of approval of the installation, from the local code authority, before requesting final acceptance of the system.

B. RELATED WORK 1. The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Work

and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to:

2. Duct smoke sensors to be installed, wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the Contractor.

3. Air handling system and smoke damper control circuits and fan status contacts are existing. They shall be wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the Contractor.

4. Sprinkler water flow alarm and valve tamper switches are new. They shall be wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the Contractor.

5. interfacing with any and all other fire alarm system related devices.

1.04 REFERENCES - APPLICABLE LISTINGS, CODES, STANDARDS, DOCUMENTS

A. STANDARDS AND CODES 1. All equipment shall be installed and complied with the current adopted provisions

of the following codes and standards. 2. All equipment shall be U.L. listed for its intended use, as a minimum, the

following standards shall apply: a. U.L. 228 - Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. b. U.L. 268 and 268A - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems. - Detectors Duct Application. c. U.L. 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. d. U.L. 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances. e. U.L. 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. f. U.L. 1480 - Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. g. U.L. 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. h. U.L. 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.

3. National Fire Protection Association Standards. a. NFPA No. 13 - 2002 Edition - Sprinkler Alarm and Supervision. b. New York City Electrical Code. c. NFPA No. 72 - 2002 Edition - National Fire Alarm Code.

Page 428: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 4 of 26

d. NFPA No. 72, 4-5 Remote Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems (If Required)

e. NFPA No. 72, 4-7 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems. f. NFPA No. 72, 3-12 Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications. g. NFPA No. 101 - 2000 Edition - Life Safety Code

4. All raceways and wiring shall be installed in compliance with NFPA Standard 70 (New York City Electrical Code - Article 760). Codes shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panel boards and similar appurtenances.

5. The fire alarm system and its installation shall comply with all applicable requirements of The Americans With Disabilities Act.

6. The fire alarm system and its installation shall comply with all other local codes and authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to, owners engineering design guidelines.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Initiating Device: A system component that originates transmission of a change of state condition, such as a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box, supervisory switch, etc.

B. Initiating Device Circuit: A circuit to which automatic or manual initiating devices are connected where the signal received does not identify the individual device operated. Typically known as a “Zone” for conventionally wired systems or circuits.

C. Notification Appliance: A fire alarm system component such as a bell, horn, strobe, printer, etc., that provides an audible or visual output or both.

D. Notification Appliance Circuit: A circuit or path directly connected to a notification appliance.

E. Signaling Line Circuit: A circuit or path between any combination of circuit interfaces, control units, or transmitters over which multiple system input or output signals or both are carried. (When used with addressable analog initiating devices, these SLC circuits are also known as “Addressable Loops”)

F. Note: Both Signaling Line Circuits and Initiating Line Circuits operate initiating devices, however, they provide different communication capabilities. Code requirements differ greatly for performance and capacities. Refer to NFPA 72, Tables 3-5.1 & 3-6.1.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system shall operate as an integrated multiplexed protected premises fire alarm monitoring and control system. 1. Changes in the status of monitored points shall be detected by the

microprocessor based Data Gathering Panel utilizing distributed processing,

Page 429: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 5 of 26

peer-to-peer networking with remote system panel’s located throughout the facility if required.

2. Sensor "dirty" and "excessively dirty" trouble conditions shall report automatically. 3. Devices shall be listed by U.L. for sensitivity testing by means of the portable

programmer/tester or by readout from the control panel. Each addressable device address shall be set electronically, devices requiring dip switch settings, rotary switch settings, staples or jumper settings are not acceptable.

4. As a minimum, DGP’s shall consist of an enclosure, power supply, digital communications circuitry, mother boards, batteries and hardware, modules, audio hardware, and circuitry described for inclusion in the fire alarm control panel as required to function as specified. System control panels shall function in stand alone fail safe mode upon loss of the FACP processing, communications or communications wiring.

5. Smoke detectors shall alarm at their programmed sensitivity settings and shall not revert to a common default setting when their operating system segment is in the default mode.

6. System individually identifies each addressable initiating device and other addressable monitor functions using multiplexing interfacing techniques.

7. System is capable of individually operating each alarm indicating appliance, and other control functions, using multiplexing techniques.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. It is the intent of these Specifications to provide a complete fire alarm system that complies in all respects with the requirements of all applicable codes and standards. Equipment, materials, software, installation practices, etc. that do not meet these requirements or do not meet the performance standards herein specified shall not be acceptable.

B. Fire alarm system equipment furnished under this Specification shall be UL listed, under the appropriate category, as a product of a single manufacture. .

C. The equipment furnished under this Specification shall be that of the specified manufacturer. Before commencing work the Contractor shall submit data showing that the contractor has successfully installed fire alarm systems of the same scope, type and design as specified. The Contractor shall also include the names and locations of at least three installations where such systems have performed satisfactorily for the preceding 18 months. 1. The Contractor shall submit three copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as

required in the State or Province having jurisdiction. 2. The installing Contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level 2

technician or a professional Engineer, registered in the State of the installation. 3. The installing Contractor shall be qualified by Underwriter's Laboratories

certifying the complete system meets UL upon completion of the installation. Ongoing maintenance and testing shall be provided to the Owner under a maintenance contract to maintain the certification.

Page 430: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 6 of 26

4. Installation contractors unable to comply with the provisions of 1.06 shall present proof of engaging the services of a subcontractor qualified to furnish the required services.

D. Provide the services of a representative or technician from the manufacturer of the system. The representative or technician is to be certified and experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. The representative shall be licensed in the State, if required by law. The fire alarm Contractor shall supervise installation, software programming, software documentation, adjustments, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The fire alarm Contractor shall also be required to provide operational instruction to the Owner's personnel. Instruction shall include system operation, maintenance, programming and arm/disarm procedures.

E. Acceptance of substitutions: Substitutions will not be permitted.

F. Should conflicts arise between project drawings and/or these Specifications, regarding design, quantities of devices or circuits, the higher quantity or cost shall be considered as correct, unless directed by the Engineer to provide other appropriate measures.

G. It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit acceptable equipment for review by the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear all liability for damages arising from his failure to submit equipment that meets these Specifications, including, but not limited to, any penalties for failure to meet construction deadline.

H. Final determination of compliance with these Specifications shall rest with the Engineers, who, at their discretion, may require proof of performance at the cost of the Contractor. Required proof may include, but shall not be limited to, expense paid visits by representatives of the Owner and Engineer to sites where identical equipment is installed and providing beneficial use.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall provide a complete and comprehensive submittal for review by the Engineer. These are to describe the proposed system and its equipment. Failure to provide a complete submittal shall be grounds for summary rejection of any incomplete submittal documentation. Contractor’s who provide Resubmittal’s, due to prior rejection, shall be subject to a review fee, should the Engineer elect to do so. The complete submittal shall include, but not be limited to, all of the following material: 1. Power Calculations

a. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the calculated requirement.

b. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment. c. Alarm power requirements for all equipment.

Page 431: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 7 of 26

d. Power supply rating justification showing power requirements for each of the system power supplies. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst case condition plus 25% spare capacity.

e. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating a worst case condition.

2. Complete manufacturer's catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements.

3. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the Contractor for the proposed system. Floor plans in a CAD compatible format showing all equipment and raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size, showing the percentage of allowable National Electric Code fill used.

4. A complete proposed system database including a description of all logic strings, control by event programming and point identification labels on a CD and in a formatted printed form, as required for offsite editing, shall be submitted for evaluation by the Owner. a. The program shall include all required interactive control functions between

the local network systems and the methods for implementing these actions. 5. Provide the address, telephone number, and contact person(s) of the

manufacturer's local service facility for normal and off hour warranty issues. 6. If the fire alarm system and its equipment is supplied by a manufacturer's

distributor, as part of the submittal documentation, the manufacturer shall provide, on its corporate letterhead, a "letter of support". Said "letter of support" shall state that, when in the opinion of the Engineer, the distributor's efforts require backup and/or assistance, the manufacturer shall provide, at no cost to the Owner, all required technical support and manpower, in a timely manner, during the installation period and for a one (1) year guarantee period starting on the date of final acceptance by the Owner and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. If said "letter of support" is not submitted, the manufacturer's equipment will be deemed unacceptable and shall be grounds for summary rejection.

7. Provide a fire alarm system function matrix. Matrix shall illustrate alarm output events in association with initiating devices input events. Matrix shall represent a summary of the installed system alarm, supervisory and trouble functions. Include any and all departures, exceptions, variances or substitutions from these Specifications and/or drawings at the time of bid. Failure to provide this requirement shall be cause for summary rejection of submittal documents where additional departures are discovered. (See Appendix-A “this document” for minimum matrix requirements and NFPA Appendix A-7-5.2.2(i) 1996).

8. For each system control panel and/or transponder panel, provide panel ampere loading during both normal and alarm mode’s, with time calculations to substantiate compliance with battery backup power requirements (battery Ampere-Hour capacity), described elsewhere in these Specifications.

9. For each system control panel and/or transponder panel, provide written schedule of active and spare addresses provided on each addressable circuit to substantiate compliance with circuit usage/spare requirements, described elsewhere in these specifications.

10. For each system control panel and system transponder notification appliance circuit provide a written schedule of spare capability in amperes and/or wattage available for future possible use.

Page 432: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 8 of 26

11. Provide manufacture’s printed product data, catalog pages and descriptions of any special installation requirements and/or procedures. Drawings depicting any special physical installation requirements shall show physical plans, elevations, all dimensions, conduit entry, minimum access clearances and any other details required.

12. Provide a signed letter and notarized statement on the manufacture’s letterhead, stating that each analog addressable data communications circuit shall support one hundred (100%) of the circuits and addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, during both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.

13. Provide shop drawings as follows: a. Coversheet with project name, address and drawing index. b. General notes drawing with peripheral device backbox size information,

part numbers, device mounting height information, and the names, addresses, point of contact, and telephone numbers of all contract project team members.

c. Device riser diagram that individually depicts all control panels, annunciators, addressable devices, and notification appliances. Shall include a specific, proposed point descriptor above each addressable device. Shall include a specific, discrete point address that shall correspond to addresses depicted on the device layout floor plans. Drawing shall provide wire specifications, and wire tags shown on all conductors depicted on the riser diagram. All circuits shall have designations that shall correspond with those require on the control panel and floor plan drawings. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted.

d. Control panel termination drawing(s). Shall depict internal component placement and all internal and field termination points. Drawing shall provide a detail indicating where conduit penetrations shall be made, so as to avoid conflicts with internally mounted batteries. For each additional data gathering panel, a separate control panel drawing shall be provided, which clearly indicated the designation, service and location of the control enclosure. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted.

e. See section 3.4 DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING for other documents relating to this section.

f. Device typical wiring diagram drawing(s) shall be provided which depict all system components, and their respective field wiring termination points. Wire type, gauge, and jacket shall also be indicated. When an addressable module is used in multiple configurations for monitoring or controlling various types of equipment, different device typical diagrams shall be provided. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted.

g. Device layout floor plans shall be created for every area served by the fire alarm system. CAD Files (AutoCAD – latest edition) shall be requested from the consulting engineer for the fire alarm system equipment vendor in the preparation of the floor plans. Floor plans shall indicate accurate locations for all control and peripheral devices. Vendor drawings shall be NO LESS THAN 1/8 INCH SCALE. All addressable devices shall be depicted with a discrete address that corresponds with that indicated on the Riser Diagram. All notification appliances shall also be provided with a

Page 433: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 9 of 26

circuit address that corresponds to that depicted on the Riser Diagram. If individual floors need to be segmented to accommodate the 1/8” scale requirements, KEY PLANS and BREAK-LINES shall be provided on the plans in an orderly and professional manner. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted.

h. Contained in the title block of each drawing shall be symbol legends with device counts, wire tag legends, circuit schedules for all addressable and notification appliance circuits, the project name/address, and a drawing description which corresponds to that indicated in the drawing index on the coversheet drawing. A section of each drawing title block shall be reserved for revision numbers and notes. The initial submission shall be Revision 0, with Revision A, B, or C as project modifications require.

14. Battery calculations shall be provided on a per power supply/charger basis based on 24 hours of supervision and 45 minutes of alarm. These calculations shall clearly indicate the quantity of devices, the device part numbers, the supervisory current draw, the alarm current draw, totals for all categories, and the calculated battery requirements. Battery calculations shall also reflect all control panel component, remote annunciator, and auxiliary relay current draws. Failure to provide these calculations shall be grounds for the complete rejection of the submittal package.

15. Table of contents, product data sheets, sequences of operation, battery calculations, installation instructions, licenses, NICET certifications and B-Size (blackline) reduced shop drawings shall be provided by the fire alarm vendor as part of a single, spiral bound submittal book. The submittal book shall have laminated covers indicating the project address, project number, system type, and contractor. The book shall consist of labeled dividers, and shall not exceed 9 ½” in width, and 11 ½” in height. No less than three (3) sets of submittal booklets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project.

16. Scale drawing sets shall be submitted along with the submittal booklets. These drawings may be either D-Size or E-Size Blueline drawings and of a sufficient resolution to be completely read. Sets shall be bound and folded so as to not take up more than 100 square inches of space. No less than three (3) sets of scale drawing sets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project.

17. The fire alarm Contractor shall provide copies of certification for service technicians formal training by the system manufacture. As a minimum, certification documents shall indicate training dates, systems qualified, name of individual certified and current status.

1.09 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Description 1. As indicated on plans.

B. Fire Smoke Damper Control Sequence of Operations 1. Under normal operation, fire smoke dampers shall be held open.

Page 434: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 10 of 26

2. Under a fire alarm condition, fire alarm system control relays shall close dampers.

3. When the fire alarm condition is cleared and the fire alarm system fan reset is activated, the fire alarm control relays at the fire smoke dampers shall close.

C. Reset of all alarm initiating device circuits, alarm notification circuits, and equipment control relays shall be accomplished from the existing Fire Control Panel. In no case shall the above alarm reset procedure cause the resetting of equipment control relays (for fans, dampers, etc.). Such devices shall require separate reset from the Fire Control Panel.

D. It shall be possible to disconnect any floor, or any device or combination of devices on any floor, from the system to allow for maintenance, repairs, or the addition of system devices and wiring without disabling any other floor. Such disconnection shall cause a visual "disabled" annunciation at the DGP and Fire Alarm Panel identifying the floor and/or devices.

E. System operation shall be such as to provide automatic and/or manual shutdown of fans larger than 2,000 CFM, and of dampers and other equipment in response to alarm initiation, as well as central status reporting.

F. System Configuration 1. Each manual station, smoke or heat detector, sprinkler/standpipe alarm or

supervisory actuating device, and alarm or supervisory initiating device shall constitute a separate zone for reporting to the Fire Alarm Panel. For display at the Fire Alarm Panel (FACP), each reporting zone (i.e., device) shall be individually identified, except that multiple smoke detectors (or multiple heat detectors) located within a single space may be identified by a common display. It shall be possible to separately identify and display the address of the individual detector(s) in alarm within any such space by means of an appropriate command at the FACP keyboard or keypad.

2. Reporting of all required alarms and supervisory signals to the Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) from initiating devices of the non-addressable type, including (but not limited to) sprinkler and standpipe waterflow and supervisory devices, manual fire alarm stations, sub-system (e.g., halon, pre-action sprinkler, etc.) alarm and supervisory contacts, and the like shall be accomplished in conjunction with addressable monitoring modules of the initiating device type (i.e., AMM/ID). AMM/ID's shall be of a type intended for connection of NFPA 72, Style 6 "branch" signalling line circuits (SLC) as described hereinbefore and shall be connected to the appropriate SLC on the floor on which they are located. Except where incorporated as part of manual fire alarm stations (or in the outlet boxes on which they are mounted), AMM/ID's shall be mounted adjacent to the associated initiating devices in outlying addressable monitor module boxes and shall be complete with engraved red nameplate. Each AMM/ID shall be interconnected to its associated initiating device by means of an initiating device circuit (IDC) as described hereinbefore. Provide an end-of-line resistor at each initiating device so as to permit supervision of the interconnecting circuitry. Terminals shall be

Page 435: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 11 of 26

incorporated in each addressable module box for the accommodation of all entering conductors.

3. Control (automatic and/or manual) and status reporting (monitoring) of equipment via the fire protective alarm system as specified hereinafter shall be accomplished by means of addressable control modules (ACM's) and addressable monitoring modules of the status reporting type (AMM/S's) located within 3'-0" of the controlled equipment in outlying addressable monitor boxes similar to those specified above for the AMM/ID's. Addressable modules (ACM's and AMM/S's) shall be provided in accordance with the following: a. ACM's and AMM/S's shall be of a type intended for connection to NFPA 72,

Style 6 "branch signalling circuits (SLC's) as described hereinbefore, and shall be connected to the appropriate SLC serving the floor on which they are located.

b. Each ACM shall provide (2) SPDT contacts suitable for use at voltages up to 250 VAC and capable of interrupting 10 amperes inductive, and shall derive its operating and supervisory current at 24VDC from the SLC. If necessary, these contact ratings shall be accommodated by means of auxiliary control relays mounted within or adjacent to the same addressable monitor boxes as the ACM's, and deriving their operating power from the associated ACM's, or directly from the associated ECC via separate supervised power supply conductors.

c. Each AMM/S shall function so as to provide a readily identifiable status indication at the FACP in response to a 120 or 208 VAC signal from the associated controlled equipment. Incorporate an auxiliary status (monitoring) relay for each AMM/S to convert a 120 or 208 VAC AC signal to a "dry" contact if the AMM/S requires a "dry" contact for proper status signal initiation. Auxiliary status relays, if required, shall be mounted in the same outlying addressable module boxes as their associated AMM/S's.

d. At locations where multiple equipment controllers are installed, the addressable modules (and any associated auxiliary relays) may be grouped in common addressable module boxes.

4. Priority of Signals: a. Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm

functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received.

b. Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. Systems that require batteries or battery backup for the programming function are unacceptable.

c. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Response: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm-initiating or supervisory-operating device causes the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal including the following: 1) General alarm.

Page 436: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 12 of 26

2) Smoke or heat detector alarm. 3) Valve tamper supervisory. 4) Elevator recall. 5) Elevator shutdown. 6) System trouble. 7) Fan shutdown.

d. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station in Engineer’s office to Building “D” MER.

e. Silencing at the FACP: Switches provide capability for acknowledgment of alarm, supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible signal and light a light-emitting diode (LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced by switch operation. Restoring alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions to normal extinguishes the associated LED and causes the audible signal to sound again until restoration is acknowledged by switch operation.

5. Smoke detectors indicated in mechanical equipment rooms shall be of the combination photocell plus fixed temperature/rate-of-rise type.

6. Smoke detection devices shall have integrally mounted pilot lamps giving a "triggered" indication.

7. Smoke detection devices which are mounted in ducts shall be supplied with remote "triggered" indication pilot wired in parallel, in an approved manner, with the similar pilots included integrally with detection units. The pilots for duct detectors shall each be flush or surface mounted within 15 feet circuiting distance of its associated detector. Mounting and location to be as indicated on Plans.

G. System Supervisory Functions 1. Maintain existing functions at FACP for all new equipment installed.

H. System Trouble Functions 1. Maintain existing functions at FACP for all new equipment installed.

I. HVAC supply-exhaust units, fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with a hand off-on-auto switch module with LED indicators. LED indication shall be red for “off”, green for “on” and amber for monitoring circuit integrity. In addition, visual indication shall be provided for positive feedback confirmation of field devices. LED status annunciation shall be real time and actual, derived from a monitored auxiliary contact on the fan contactor, sail switch or atmospheric pressure switch installed downstream from the fan.

Page 437: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 13 of 26

PART 2 - SYSTEM OPERATION

2.01 BASIC SYSTEM EQUIPMENT, CIRCUITING, ADDRESSING AND OPERATING CAPABILITIES

A. The catalog numbers used are those of Edwards EST by UTC Fire and Security. No equals.

B. All products used shall be of a single manufacturer. Submission of notification appliances, auxiliary relays, or documentation from other than a single manufacturer shall not be acceptable and will be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.

C. The Fire Alarm System supplied under this specification shall be of a microprocessor-based Peer to Peer Token Ring network type system. All Control Panel Assemblies and connected Field Appliances shall be both designed and manufactured by the same company, and shall be tested and cross-listed as compatible to ensure that a fully functioning system is designed and installed. In order to insure maximum system survivability, a DGP will be provided as indicated. The DGP shall be designed with the highest level of survivability in mind.

D. Circuiting Guidelines 1. Each Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) shall be circuited so device loading is not to

exceed 80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. The loop shall have Class B operation. Each DGP shall include an SLC loop on a per floor basis. T-Tapping a selected loop to cover an alternate floor shall not be accepted.

2. NAC Circuits shall have Class B operation. Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: a. Audible Signals: Provide sufficient spare capacity to assure that the

addition of five (5) audible devices can be supported without the need for addition control components (power supplies, signal circuit modules, amplifiers, batteries, etc.)

b. Visual Signals Provide sufficient spare capacity to assure that the addition of three (3) visual devices can be supported without the need for addition control components (power supplies, signal circuit modules, batteries, etc.)

3. Where it is necessary to interface conventional initiating devices provide intelligent input modules to supervise Class B zone wiring.

4. Each of the following types of devices or equipment shall be provided with supervised circuits as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: a. Sprinkler Valve Supervisory Switches: Provide one (1) supervisory module

circuit for each sprinkler valve supervisory switch. b. When waterflow and tamper switches exist at the same location, provide

one (1) dual input addressable module. When odd numbers of devices exist at a single location, provide additional single input addressable modules.

Page 438: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 14 of 26

5. Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system shall be provided with a form ‘C’ control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but shall be typically as follows: a. HVAC Fan Systems: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for

each HVAC fan system. b. HVAC Supply Fans: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for

each HVAC supply fan. c. HVAC Return Fans: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for

each HVAC return fan. 6. Provide a dedicated 24VDC circuit to feed all auxiliary relays required for

inductive loads. Circuits shall be supervised via an end-of-line relay and addressable input module. Auxiliary relays shall not derive their power from the starter or load being controlled.

7. Each control or data gathering panel shall have a dedicated minimum 20Amp-120VAC feed. An appropriate fuse cut out shall be included, wired as indicated in the Electrical Code for the City of NY.

8. In no case shall any fire alarm circuit be sized beyond 80% of circuit capacity.

E. System power supplies, including necessary transformers rectifiers, regulators, filters and surge protection required for system operation, with the capacity to power the system in a worst case condition with all devices in alarm and all local indicating appliances active without exceeding the listed ratings. All system devices shall display normal and alarm conditions consistently whether operating from normal power or reserve (standby) power. 1. Sounding Devices:

a. Sounding devices shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all occupants of the building and/or fire area, as required by these Specifications.

b. Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of a least 60 seconds (whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupiable area. The average ambient sound level is the root mean square. A-weighed sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period.

2. Audible notification appliances shall be powered by dedicated notification circuits. Visual notification appliances shall be powered by dedicated notification circuits. Audible appliances and visual appliances shall not be powered by the same notification circuit. Combination audible/visual devices may be used, but shall be wired as per this Specification.

3. Visual signals shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of the U.L.1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual signals are visible from any location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate. a. UL 1971 Listed for Emergency Devices for the Hearing Impaired in all

public mode installations. b. Strobes shall meet UL 1971 and produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per

second minimum over the Listed input voltage (20VDC - 31VDC) range.

Page 439: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 15 of 26

c. All visual signals shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid state circuitry.

d. The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of 4 field selectable strobe settings for 15,30,75 or 110 candela (wall mount). The switch for setting the candela shall be mounted in the rear of the unit, to prevent tampering. Use Wheelock Model RSS-24 MCW-FR.

e. The strobes shall be available for semi-flush or surface mounting and in combination with audible signals at locations shown on drawings.

4. Horns and Horn Strobes. a. The horns shall be UL Listed under Standard 1480 for Fire Protective

Service: horn appliances equipped with strobes shall additionally be listed under UL Standard 1971, Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.

b. The strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the voltage range of 16 to 33VDC for 24 VDC models. They shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube in a rugged Lexan lens. The strobe shall draw low current with zero inrush. The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of four (4) field selectable settings: 15,30,75 or 110 candela. The switch for selecting the intensity shall be mounted in the rear, to prevent tampering by unauthorized persons.

c. Horns and Horn strobes shall be installed to meet NFPA 72 (1999) and ADA requirements.

5. HVAC supply-exhaust units, fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with a hand off-on-auto switch module with LED indicators. LED indication shall be red for “off”, green for “on” and amber for monitoring circuit integrity. In addition, visual indication shall be provided for positive feedback confirmation of field devices. LED status annunciation shall be real time and actual, derived from a monitored auxiliary contact on the fan contactor, sail switch or atmospheric pressure switch installed downstream from the fan.

6. Devices shall be listed by U.L. for sensitivity testing by means of the portable programmer/tester or by readout from the DGP or FACP panel. Device address and sensitivity assignments shall be predetermined electronically, devices requiring dip switch settings, rotary switch settings, staples or jumper settings are not acceptable.

7. Smoke detectors shall alarm at their programmed sensitivity settings and shall not revert to a common default setting when their operating system segment is in the default mode.

8. Software and Firmware Control: a. All software and firmware provided with a fire alarm system shall be listed

for use with the fire alarm control unit. b. A record of installed software and firmware version numbers shall be

maintained at the location of the fire alarm control unit. c. All software and firmware shall be protected from unauthorized changes

through the use of "access levels."

2.02 UL LISTED AND APPROVED EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Alarm Panel/DGP, Fire Alarm Control Panel Requirements: The fire alarm control panel or panels and all system devices (speaker-strobes, strobes, pull stations, smoke

Page 440: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 16 of 26

and heat detectors, etc. shall be Edwards Systems Technology (EST) type EST3 series. All under one label “UL listed and approved” for the use of fire alarm systems in this area of the United States of America. The operating controls shall be located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and all zone locations shall be identified.

B. System Controllers: The main controller 3-CPU shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design supporting up to 125 detectors and 125 remote modules per addressable Signaling line Circuit (SLC). The CPU shall support up to 10 SLC's per panel for a total system capacity of 2500 Intelligent Addressable points. The system shall be designed with peer-to-peer networking capability for enhanced survivability, with support for up to 64 nodes, each with up to 2500 points and an overall capacity of 160,000 points. The cabinets shall be steel.

C. The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile memory. All site specific and operating data shall survive a complete power failure intact. Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations.

D. The Main Controller Module shall control and monitor all local or remote peripherals. It shall support a large 960 character LCD, power supply, remote LCD and zone display annunciators, printers, and support communication interface standard protocol (CSI) devices such as color computer annunciators and color graphic displays. Remote LCD annunciators shall also display each and every point in the system and be sized with the same number of characters as in the main FACP display.

E. The panel shall have an interface module for remote site monitoring. The control panel shall include built-in (part of the fire alarm control panel) Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)) module to transmit smoke, supervisory, waterflow, trouble, CO Alarm (if included), pump running, and pump trouble events to a Central Monitoring Station (CMS) company. The DACT shall support dual telephones lines, Contact I.D. communications, and configured for dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to delay AC power failure reports, auto test call, and be site programmable. The DACT shall be capable of transmitting every individual condition to the central station via Contact I.D. format. Selection of Contact I.D. format SHALL be of the discretion of the engineer and building owner but shall be an available option. Contractors who choose a separate dialer must meet all of the above options and are responsible for all necessary added connections such as power (with FCO/FDS), conduit, wire, addressable interface modules etc.

F. The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address and map all system devices attached to the main controller. A minimum default single stage alarm system operation shall be supported with alarm silence, event silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls.

G. Advanced Windows-based System Definition Utility with Program Version Reporting to document any and all changes made during system start-up or system commissioning shall be used to maintain site specific programming. Time and Date Stamps of all modifications made to the program must be included to allow full retention of all

Page 441: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 17 of 26

previous program version data. It shall support programming of any input point to any output point. The system shall support the use of Bar Code readers to assist custom programming functions. It shall allow authorized customization of fundamental system operations using initiating events to start actions, timers, sequences and logical algorithms. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards, and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

H. The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic device mapping, electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, dirty detector identification, automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, sounder bases and isolator bases.

I. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of “same type” devices without the need of addressing and impose the “location” parameters on replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is mapped and defined into the system.

J. Each controller shall contain a RS232 printer/programming port for programming locally via an IBM PC. When operational, each controller shall support a printer through the RS232 port and be capable of message routing.

K. Single stage operation shall be provided.

L. The system shall have a UL Listed Detector Sensitivity test feature, which will be a function of the smoke detectors and performed automatically every 4 hours.

M. The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a 100% compliment of detector isolator bases.

N. All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or removed.

O. The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail.

P. Audible notification appliances shall be affected by signal silence features. Visual signal appliance shall not be affected by signal silence features.

Q. Power Supplies: The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 7.0A continuous for notification appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 7A to output circuits for a maximum period of 100 ms. All outputs shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 45 minutes.

Page 442: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 18 of 26

R. Auxiliary power supplies shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 7.0A continuous for notification appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 7A to output circuits for a maximum period of 100 ms. All outputs shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 45 minutes.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Intelligent Devices — General: Each remote device shall have a microprocessor with non-volatile memory to support its functionality and serviceability. Each device shall store as required for its functionality the following data: device serial number, device address, device type, personality code, date of manufacture, hours in use, time and date of last alarm, amount of environmental compensation left/used, last maintenance date, job/project number, current detector sensitivity values, diagnostic information (trouble codes) and algorithms required to process sensor data and perform communications with the loop controller. Each device shall be capable of electronic addressing, either automatically or application programmed assigned, to support physical/electrical mapping and supervision by location. Setting a device’s address by physical means shall not be necessary.

B. Intelligent Detectors — General: The System Intelligent Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent fire detection algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions, time patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal patterns that are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters. Devices not capable of combining different fire parameters or employing digital filters shall not be acceptable. Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions based on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the data flow between detector and analog loop controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be 0.5 seconds. Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32 diagnostic codes. This information shall be available for system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient “Environmental Thresholds” approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall continually monitor the

Page 443: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 19 of 26

environmental impact of temperature, humidity, other contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to both 24-hour long term and 4-hour short-term environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the “learned” base line sensitivity. The base line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at the detector approximately once every hour. The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any Signature Series detector mounting base.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detector, SIGA2-PS: Provide intelligent photoelectric smoke detectors SIGA2-PS. The analog photoelectric detector shall utilize a light scattering type photoelectric smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The information shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 ft (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 ft (0.91m) high and 3 ft (0.91m) wide with air velocities up to 5,000 ft/min. (0-25.39 m/sec) without requiring specific duct detector housings or supply tubes. The percent smoke obscuration per foot alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.0% to 3.5%. The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: Temperature:

32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC), Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing, Elevation: no limit.

D. Standard Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-SB / SIGA-SB4: Provide standard detector mounting bases SIGA-SB suitable for mounting on North American 1-gang, 3½” or 4” octagon box and 4” square box. The base shall, contain no electronics, support all Signature Series detector types and have the following minimum requirements: Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors, Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base, bases that must be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be acceptable. The base shall be capable of supporting one (1) Signature Series SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED Indicator. Provide remote LED alarm indicators where shown on the plans.

E. Audible Detector Mounting Base, SIGA-AB4GT. Where shown on the project plans include detector audible/sounder base model SIGA-AB4GT. The sounder base shall be capable of two tones, Temporal 3 for a fire condition and Temporal 4 for a Carbon monoxide condition. The tones shall be fully programmable and also synchronize the sound with other sounder bases. The system shall be UL2017 listed for dual signaling for this purpose.

Page 444: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 20 of 26

F. Duct Detector Housing, SIGA-SD: Provide model SIGA-SD Low profile intelligent addressable DUCT smoke detector as indicated on the project plans. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 100 and 4,000 feet per minute and include a wide sensitivity range of .79 to 2.46%/ft. Obscuration. Include one Form-C shut down relay rated 2.0 amps @ 30 Vdc and also include slave high contact relays if required. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. The addressable DUCT housing shall be suitable for extreme environments, including a temperature range of –20 to 158 degrees F (-29 to 70 degrees Celsius) and offer a harsh environment gasket option. Provide Remote Alarm LED Indicators SIGA-LED and/or remote test station model SD-TRK as indicated on the project plans.

G. Intelligent Modules — General: It shall be possible to address each Intelligent Signature Series module without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC), Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing.

H. Single Input Module, SIGA-CT1 (Waterflow Detectors, Tamper Switches etc.): Provide intelligent single input modules SIGA-CT1. The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. The single input module shall support the following circuit types: Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.), Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches), Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.), Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches).

I. Dual Input Module, SIGA-CT2: Provide intelligent dual input modules SIGA-CT2. The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types: Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.), Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches), Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.), Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches).

Page 445: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 21 of 26

J. Single Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC1: Provide intelligent single input signal modules SIGA-CC1. The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own “ring tone”. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support the following operations: Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A).

K. Control Relay Module, SIGA-CR: Provide intelligent control relay modules SIGA-CR. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form “R” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers.

L. Notification Appliances – General: All appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service. All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be UL 1971 and ULC S526 Listed. All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Panel (NO EXCEPTIONS) specified to insure absolute compatibility between the appliances and the control panels, and to insure that the application of the appliances are done in accordance with the single manufacturers’ instructions. Any appliances that do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for use must show written proof of their compatibility for the purpose intended. Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from THE CONTROL PANEL MANUFACTURER clearly stating that the control equipment (as submitted) is 100% compatible with the submitted Notification Appliances.

M. Strobes, G1RF-VM Series: Provide EST Series G1RF-VM series low profile wall mounted strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe output shall be field selectable as indicated on the drawings in one of the following intensity levels; 15cd, 30cd, 75cd or 110cd. Low profile strobes shall mount in a North American 1-gang box or surface mounted on a matching back box provided by the manufacturer, as directed in the field

N. Multi-Voltage Control Relays, MR-200 Series: Provide remote control relays connected to supervised ancillary circuits for control of fans, dampers, door releases, etc. Relay contact ratings shall be DPDT and rated for 10 amperes at 115 Vac. A single relay may be energized from a voltage source of 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac, or 230 Vac. A red LED shall indicate the relay is energized. A metal enclosure shall be provided.

O. Fire alarm equipment shall be powered through an approved Fuse Disconnect Switch (FDS) connected ahead of the main service switch. The FDS shall be heavy duty (200,000 rms short circuit amps) safety switch, painted red, include a ground and Neutral kit with grounding screw (to bond neutral), include a padlock with Y1 cylinder

Page 446: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 22 of 26

keyed to a NYC/FDNY 2642 key (use ABUS re-keyable 83-45 or equivalent lock). All wiring shall be #10 minimum THHN or equivalent run in ¾ inch EMT/RGS and in accordance with NYC requirements. The ground to the FDS shall be made using a NYC accepted method (see NYC electrical code), and the ground wire to the FDS shall be #8 minimum (larger if necessary to meet feed size). The equipment ground leaving from the FDS connecting to the fire alarm equipment shall include a #10 green ground. The FDS panel shall bear an engraved white-core phenolic or bakelite identification nameplate stating in minimum one-quarter inch (1/4”) high white letters on a red background “FIRE ALARM FUSED DISCONNECT”.

P. Where additional circuits are required by the fire alarm system, a Fused Cutout, properly sized shall be included, wired after the FDS. The size of the fuses shall be sized appropriately but be twenty (20) amperes minimum. The fused cut-out panel shall bear an engraved white-core phenolic or bakelite identification nameplate stating in minimum one-quarter inch (1/4”) high white letters on a red background “FIRE ALARM FUSED CUT-OUT”. The neutral shall not be bonded in the Fused cutout”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install system according to NFPA standards referenced in Parts 1 and 2 of this Section.

B. Fire Alarm Power Supply Disconnect: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with lockable handle or cover.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48 inches (1220 mm) above the finished floor or lower as indicated.

B. Waterflow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised.

C. Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling-mounted detectors not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than 12 inches (300 mm), below the ceiling. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of the joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 60 inches (1520 mm) from air registers.

D. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 90 inches (2280 mm) above the finished floor nor less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine audible and visual alarms at the same location into a single unit.

Page 447: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 23 of 26

E. Visual Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finished floor and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.

F. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

G. DGP: Surface mount with top of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

H. Addressable Modules: For individual dampers - in control boxes at each damper; for other controlled and/or monitored equipment - in dedicated control box within 3'-0" of the equipment.

3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: For exposed runs install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. No raceways are required for fire alarm cables installation in hollow partitions and hung ceilings.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in 3unction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

E. Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visual alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

F. Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.

G. Minimum temperature rating of the cables shall be 150 Deg. Celsius.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

Page 448: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 24 of 26

3.05 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding equipment conductor and terminate it at water main. Refer to Section 26 05 26 for detailed requirements.

D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests.

D. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.

E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the

circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings.

4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.

5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. one connection each should be opened at not less than 10

Page 449: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 25 of 26

percent of the initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used.

6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.

7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.

8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.

F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.

G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests.

H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed.

3.07 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.08 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of 8 hours' training.

2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid.

3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.

Page 450: Fashion Institute of Technology · 2019-08-13 · Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371 4/7/2017

Fashion Institute of Technology MFA Fashion Design A605 Renovations

Building A, Dubinsky Center, 6th Floor Project C1371

4/7/2017

Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Page 26 of 26

3.09 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 3 requested adjustment visits to the site for this purpose.

END OF SECTION 28 31 13